796870

ZyXEL GS1900 series Handleiding

265
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/273
Pagina verder
Default Login Details
User’s Guide
GS1900 Series
GbE Smart Managed Switch
Copyright © 2022 Zyxel and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
IP Address http://192.168.1.1 (In-band ports)
User Name admin
Password 1234
Version 2.70 Edition 2, 04/2022
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
2
IMPORTANT!
READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE.
KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
Screenshots and graphics in this book may differ slightly from your product due to differences in your
product firmware or your computer operating system. Every effort has been made to ensure that the
information in this manual is accurate.
Note: This guide is a reference for a series of products. Therefore some features or options in
this guide may not be available in your product.
Note: It is recommended you use the Web Configurator to configure the Switch.
Related Documentation
• Online Help
Click the help link for a description of the fields in the Switch menus.
•More Information
Go to https://businessforum.zyxel.com for product discussions.
•Go to support.zyxel.com to find other information on the Switch.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
3
Document Conventions
Warnings and Notes
These are how warnings and notes are shown in this guide.
Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device.
Note: Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may need to
configure or helpful tips) or recommendations.
Syntax Conventions
• All models may be referred to as the “Switch” in this guide.
• Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font.
• A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example, Configuration >
System > Information means you first click Configuration in the navigation panel, then the System sub
menu and finally the Information tab to get to that screen.
Icons Used in Figures
Figures in this user guide may use the following generic icons. The Switch icon is not an exact
representation of your device.
Switch Generic Switch Generic Router
IP Camera Firewall Cell Tower
Printer Server
Contents Overview
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
4
Contents Overview
User’s Guide ......................................................................................................................................16
Getting to Know Your Switch .............................................................................................................. 17
Hardware Installation and Connection ............................................................................................. 25
Hardware Overview ............................................................................................................................. 31
ZON Utility ............................................................................................................................................... 45
Web Configurator ................................................................................................................................. 50
Getting Started ..................................................................................................................................... 61
Technical Reference ........................................................................................................................73
Monitor: System ..................................................................................................................................... 74
Monitor: Port .......................................................................................................................................... 77
Monitor: VLAN ....................................................................................................................................... 86
Monitor: MAC Table ............................................................................................................................. 92
Monitor: Link Aggregation ................................................................................................................... 95
Monitor: Loop Guard ........................................................................................................................... 97
Monitor: Multicast ............................................................................................................................... 100
Monitor: Spanning Tree ...................................................................................................................... 104
Monitor: LLDP ....................................................................................................................................... 110
Monitor: Security ................................................................................................................................. 114
Monitor: Management ...................................................................................................................... 117
Configuration: System ........................................................................................................................ 120
Configuration: Port ............................................................................................................................. 125
Configuration: VLAN .......................................................................................................................... 138
Configuration: MAC Table ................................................................................................................ 149
Configuration: Link Aggregation ...................................................................................................... 152
Configuration: Loop Guard ............................................................................................................... 158
Configuration: Mirror .......................................................................................................................... 161
Configuration: Time Range Group ................................................................................................... 164
Configuration: Multicast .................................................................................................................... 169
Configuration: Spanning Tree ........................................................................................................... 177
Configuration: LLDP ............................................................................................................................ 186
Configuration: QoS ............................................................................................................................. 198
Configuration: Security ...................................................................................................................... 207
Configuration: AAA ............................................................................................................................ 216
Configuration: Management ............................................................................................................ 221
Maintenance ...................................................................................................................................... 238
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................. 250
Table of Contents
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
5
Table of Contents
Document Conventions ......................................................................................................................3
Contents Overview .............................................................................................................................4
Table of Contents.................................................................................................................................5
Part I: User’s Guide..........................................................................................16
Chapter 1
Getting to Know Your Switch ............................................................................................................17
1.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 17
1.1.1 Hardware Version Information ............................................................................................ 17
1.1.2 Hardware Comparison ......................................................................................................... 19
1.2 Example Applications .................................................................................................................... 20
1.2.1 PoE Example Application ..................................................................................................... 20
1.2.2 Backbone Example Application ......................................................................................... 21
1.2.3 Bridging or Fiber-optic Uplink Example Application .......................................................... 21
1.2.4 Gigabit Ethernet to the Desktop ......................................................................................... 22
1.2.5 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Application Example ............................................................................. 22
1.2.6 IPv6 Support ........................................................................................................................... 23
1.3 Ways to Manage the Switch ......................................................................................................... 23
1.4 Good Habits for Managing the Switch ........................................................................................24
Chapter 2
Hardware Installation and Connection ...........................................................................................25
2.1 Safety Precautions .......................................................................................................................... 25
2.2 Installation Scenarios ...................................................................................................................... 25
2.3 Desktop Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................... 26
2.4 Wall Mounting ................................................................................................................................. 26
2.4.1 Wall-mounted Installation Requirement ............................................................................. 27
2.5 Rack Mounting ................................................................................................................................ 28
2.5.1 Rack-mounted Installation Requirement ........................................................................... 28
2.5.2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch ............................................................... 29
2.5.3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack .......................................................................................... 29
Chapter 3
Hardware Overview...........................................................................................................................31
3.1 Front Panel Connections ............................................................................................................... 31
Table of Contents
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
6
3.1.1 Ethernet Ports ......................................................................................................................... 33
3.1.2 SFP Slots .................................................................................................................................. 33
3.1.3 PoE Mode Button .................................................................................................................. 36
3.2 Rear Panel ....................................................................................................................................... 36
3.2.1 Grounding .............................................................................................................................. 38
3.2.2 Power Connection ................................................................................................................ 40
3.3 LEDs .................................................................................................................................................. 41
3.4 Resetting the Switch ....................................................................................................................... 43
3.5 Rebooting the Switch ..................................................................................................................... 44
Chapter 4
ZON Utility ...........................................................................................................................................45
4.1 Zyxel One Network (ZON) Utility .................................................................................................... 45
4.1.1 Requirements ......................................................................................................................... 45
4.1.2 Run the ZON Utility ................................................................................................................. 46
Chapter 5
Web Configurator...............................................................................................................................50
5.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 50
5.2 Access .............................................................................................................................................. 50
5.3 Navigating the Web Configurator ............................................................................................... 52
5.3.1 Title Bar ................................................................................................................................... 52
5.3.2 Navigation Panel .................................................................................................................. 53
Chapter 6
Getting Started...................................................................................................................................61
6.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 61
6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ....................................................................................... 61
6.2 Getting Started ............................................................................................................................... 61
6.2.1 Wizard ..................................................................................................................................... 62
Part II: Technical Reference...........................................................................73
Chapter 7
Monitor: System..................................................................................................................................74
7.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 74
7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ....................................................................................... 74
7.2 IP Settings ......................................................................................................................................... 74
7.2.1 IPv4 Settings ........................................................................................................................... 74
7.2.2 IPv6 Settings ........................................................................................................................... 75
7.3 Information ...................................................................................................................................... 75
Table of Contents
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
7
Chapter 8
Monitor: Port .......................................................................................................................................77
8.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 77
8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ....................................................................................... 77
8.2 Port Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 77
8.2.1 Status ...................................................................................................................................... 77
8.2.2 Port Counters ......................................................................................................................... 78
8.2.3 Bandwidth Utilization ............................................................................................................ 80
8.3 PoE Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 81
8.4 Bandwidth Management .............................................................................................................. 83
8.4.1 Bandwidth Control ................................................................................................................ 83
8.5 Storm Control .................................................................................................................................. 84
Chapter 9
Monitor: VLAN.....................................................................................................................................86
9.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 86
9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ....................................................................................... 86
9.2 VLAN Settings .................................................................................................................................. 86
9.2.1 VLAN ....................................................................................................................................... 86
9.2.2 Port .......................................................................................................................................... 87
9.2.3 VLAN Port ............................................................................................................................... 88
9.3 Guest VLAN ..................................................................................................................................... 89
9.4 Voice VLAN ..................................................................................................................................... 90
Chapter 10
Monitor: MAC Table...........................................................................................................................92
10.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 92
10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..................................................................................... 93
10.2 MAC Table ..................................................................................................................................... 93
Chapter 11
Monitor: Link Aggregation ................................................................................................................95
11.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 95
11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..................................................................................... 95
11.2 Link Aggregation .......................................................................................................................... 95
Chapter 12
Monitor: Loop Guard .........................................................................................................................97
12.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 97
12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..................................................................................... 98
12.2 Loop Guard ................................................................................................................................... 98
Table of Contents
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
8
Chapter 13
Monitor: Multicast.............................................................................................................................100
13.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 100
13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 100
13.2 IGMP Settings .............................................................................................................................. 100
13.2.1 VLAN ................................................................................................................................... 100
13.2.2 Statistics .............................................................................................................................. 101
13.2.3 Group ................................................................................................................................. 102
13.2.4 Router ................................................................................................................................. 103
Chapter 14
Monitor: Spanning Tree....................................................................................................................104
14.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 104
14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 104
14.2 Spanning Tree ............................................................................................................................. 104
14.2.1 CIST Settings ....................................................................................................................... 104
14.2.2 CIST Port .............................................................................................................................. 105
14.2.3 MST Settings ....................................................................................................................... 106
14.2.4 MST Port .............................................................................................................................. 107
14.2.5 STP Statistics ........................................................................................................................ 108
Chapter 15
Monitor: LLDP ....................................................................................................................................110
15.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 110
15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 110
15.2 LLDP Settings ............................................................................................................................... 110
15.2.1 Statistics Settings ................................................................................................................ 110
15.2.2 Remote Information .......................................................................................................... 111
15.2.3 Overloading ....................................................................................................................... 112
Chapter 16
Monitor: Security ..............................................................................................................................114
16.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 114
16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 114
16.2 Port Security ................................................................................................................................. 114
16.3 802.1X Security Settings .............................................................................................................. 115
16.3.1 Port Settings ....................................................................................................................... 115
16.3.2 Authenticated Hosts ......................................................................................................... 116
Chapter 17
Monitor: Management ....................................................................................................................117
17.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 117
17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 117
Table of Contents
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
9
17.2 Syslog ........................................................................................................................................... 117
17.3 Error Disable ................................................................................................................................. 118
Chapter 18
Configuration: System .....................................................................................................................120
18.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 120
18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 120
18.2 IP Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 120
18.2.1 IPv4 Settings ....................................................................................................................... 120
18.2.2 IPv6 Settings ....................................................................................................................... 121
18.3 Time .............................................................................................................................................. 122
18.3.1 System Time Settings ......................................................................................................... 122
18.3.2 SNTP Server Settings .......................................................................................................... 123
18.4 Information .................................................................................................................................. 123
18.4.1 System Information Settings .............................................................................................123
Chapter 19
Configuration: Port...........................................................................................................................125
19.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 125
19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 125
19.2 Port Settings ................................................................................................................................. 125
19.2.1 Port ...................................................................................................................................... 125
19.2.2 Port Edit .............................................................................................................................. 126
19.3 EEE Settings .................................................................................................................................. 127
19.3.1 EEE ....................................................................................................................................... 127
19.3.2 EEE Edit ............................................................................................................................... 128
19.4 PoE Settings ................................................................................................................................. 129
19.4.1 Global Settings .................................................................................................................. 129
19.4.2 Port Settings ....................................................................................................................... 129
19.4.3 PoE Edit ............................................................................................................................... 131
19.5 Bandwidth Management .......................................................................................................... 134
19.5.1 Bandwidth Control ............................................................................................................ 134
19.5.2 Port Rate Edit ..................................................................................................................... 135
19.6 Storm Control .............................................................................................................................. 135
19.6.1 Port Settings ....................................................................................................................... 136
19.6.2 Port Edit .............................................................................................................................. 136
Chapter 20
Configuration: VLAN........................................................................................................................138
20.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 138
20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 138
20.2 VLAN Settings .............................................................................................................................. 139
20.2.1 VLAN ................................................................................................................................... 139
Table of Contents
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
10
20.2.2 VLAN Add .......................................................................................................................... 139
20.2.3 Port Settings ....................................................................................................................... 140
20.2.4 Port Edit .............................................................................................................................. 141
20.2.5 VLAN Port ........................................................................................................................... 141
20.3 Guest VLAN ................................................................................................................................. 143
20.3.1 Global Settings .................................................................................................................. 143
20.3.2 Port Settings ....................................................................................................................... 144
20.3.3 Port Edit .............................................................................................................................. 144
20.4 Voice VLAN ................................................................................................................................. 145
20.4.1 Global Settings .................................................................................................................. 145
20.4.2 OUI Settings ........................................................................................................................ 146
20.4.3 OUI Add or Edit .................................................................................................................. 147
20.4.4 Port Settings ....................................................................................................................... 147
20.4.5 Port Edit .............................................................................................................................. 148
Chapter 21
Configuration: MAC Table...............................................................................................................149
21.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 149
21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 149
21.1.2 Static MAC ......................................................................................................................... 149
21.1.3 Static MAC Address .......................................................................................................... 150
21.1.4 Filtering MAC Address ....................................................................................................... 150
21.1.5 Filtering MAC Address (Add) ........................................................................................... 151
21.1.6 Dynamic Age .................................................................................................................... 151
Chapter 22
Configuration: Link Aggregation....................................................................................................152
22.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 152
22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 152
22.2 Link Aggregation ........................................................................................................................ 152
22.2.1 Global Settings .................................................................................................................. 152
22.2.2 LAG Management ............................................................................................................ 153
22.2.3 LAG Management (Add) ................................................................................................ 154
22.2.4 LAG Port ............................................................................................................................. 155
22.2.5 LAG Port Edit ...................................................................................................................... 155
22.2.6 LACP Port ........................................................................................................................... 156
22.2.7 LACP Port Edit .................................................................................................................... 157
Chapter 23
Configuration: Loop Guard.............................................................................................................158
23.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 158
23.2 Loop Guard ................................................................................................................................. 158
23.2.1 Global Settings .................................................................................................................. 158
Table of Contents
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
11
23.2.2 Loop Guard Port ............................................................................................................... 159
23.2.3 Port Edit .............................................................................................................................. 159
Chapter 24
Configuration: Mirror........................................................................................................................161
24.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 161
24.2 Mirror Settings .............................................................................................................................. 161
24.2.1 Mirror ................................................................................................................................... 161
Chapter 25
Configuration: Time Range Group .................................................................................................164
25.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 164
25.1.1 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................. 164
25.2 Time Range Group ..................................................................................................................... 164
25.2.1 Time Range Group Settings ............................................................................................. 164
25.2.2 Time Range Add ............................................................................................................... 165
25.2.3 Time Range Edit ................................................................................................................. 166
Chapter 26
Configuration: Multicast..................................................................................................................169
26.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 169
26.2 IGMP Settings .............................................................................................................................. 169
26.2.1 Global Settings .................................................................................................................. 169
26.2.2 VLAN Settings ..................................................................................................................... 170
26.2.3 Edit IGMP ............................................................................................................................ 171
26.2.4 Router Port ......................................................................................................................... 172
26.2.5 Add or Edit Router Port ..................................................................................................... 172
26.2.6 Profile Settings .................................................................................................................... 173
26.2.7 Add or Edit Profile .............................................................................................................. 174
26.2.8 Throttling Settings .............................................................................................................. 174
26.2.9 Edit Throttling ..................................................................................................................... 175
Chapter 27
Configuration: Spanning Tree.........................................................................................................177
27.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 177
27.2 Spanning Tree ............................................................................................................................. 177
27.2.1 Global Settings .................................................................................................................. 177
27.2.2 STP Port ............................................................................................................................... 178
27.2.3 STP Port Edit ........................................................................................................................ 179
27.2.4 CIST Settings ....................................................................................................................... 180
27.2.5 CIST Port .............................................................................................................................. 181
27.2.6 CIST Port Edit ...................................................................................................................... 181
27.2.7 MST Settings ....................................................................................................................... 182
Table of Contents
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
12
27.2.8 Add or Edit MST ................................................................................................................. 183
27.2.9 MST Port Settings ................................................................................................................ 183
27.2.10 MST Port Edit ..................................................................................................................... 184
Chapter 28
Configuration: LLDP..........................................................................................................................186
28.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 186
28.2 LLDP Settings ............................................................................................................................... 186
28.2.1 Global Settings .................................................................................................................. 186
28.2.2 Port Settings ....................................................................................................................... 187
28.2.3 Port Edit .............................................................................................................................. 188
28.2.4 Local Information Settings ................................................................................................ 189
28.2.5 Local Information Edit ....................................................................................................... 191
28.2.6 MED Network Policy .......................................................................................................... 194
28.2.7 MED Network Policy Add or Edit ..................................................................................... 194
28.2.8 MED Port ............................................................................................................................. 196
28.2.9 MED Port Edit ..................................................................................................................... 196
Chapter 29
Configuration: QoS ..........................................................................................................................198
29.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 198
29.2 General Settings ......................................................................................................................... 198
29.2.1 Port Settings ....................................................................................................................... 198
29.2.2 Port Edit .............................................................................................................................. 199
29.2.3 Queue Settings .................................................................................................................. 200
29.2.4 CoS Mapping .................................................................................................................... 201
29.2.5 DSCP Mapping .................................................................................................................. 202
29.2.6 IP Precedence Mapping .................................................................................................. 203
29.3 Trust Mode ................................................................................................................................... 204
29.3.1 Global Settings .................................................................................................................. 204
29.3.2 Port Settings ....................................................................................................................... 204
29.3.3 Trust Mode Edit .................................................................................................................. 205
Chapter 30
Configuration: Security....................................................................................................................207
30.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 207
30.2 Port Security ................................................................................................................................. 207
30.2.1 Global Settings .................................................................................................................. 207
30.2.2 Port Settings ....................................................................................................................... 207
30.2.3 Port Edit .............................................................................................................................. 208
30.3 Port Isolation ................................................................................................................................ 209
30.3.1 Port Isolation Settings ........................................................................................................ 209
30.3.2 Port Isolation Edit ............................................................................................................... 210
Table of Contents
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
13
30.4 802.1X Settings ............................................................................................................................ 210
30.4.1 Global Settings .................................................................................................................. 210
30.4.2 Port Settings ....................................................................................................................... 211
30.4.3 Port Edit .............................................................................................................................. 212
30.5 DoS Settings ................................................................................................................................. 213
30.5.1 Global Settings .................................................................................................................. 213
30.5.2 Port Settings ....................................................................................................................... 213
30.5.3 Port Edit .............................................................................................................................. 214
30.5.4 DoS Attack Types .............................................................................................................. 215
Chapter 31
Configuration: AAA..........................................................................................................................216
31.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 216
31.2 Auth Method ............................................................................................................................... 216
31.2.1 Auth Method Settings ....................................................................................................... 216
31.2.2 Auth Method Add or Edit .................................................................................................216
31.3 RADIUS Settings ........................................................................................................................... 217
31.3.1 RADIUS ................................................................................................................................ 217
31.3.2 RADIUS Add or Edit ............................................................................................................ 218
31.4 TACACS+ Settings ....................................................................................................................... 219
31.4.1 TACACS+ ............................................................................................................................ 219
31.4.2 TACACS+ Add or Edit ....................................................................................................... 219
Chapter 32
Configuration: Management..........................................................................................................221
32.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 221
32.2 Syslog Settings ............................................................................................................................. 221
32.2.1 Global Settings .................................................................................................................. 221
32.2.2 Local Settings ..................................................................................................................... 221
32.2.3 Local Add or Edit ............................................................................................................... 222
32.2.4 Remote Settings ................................................................................................................ 223
32.2.5 Remote Add or Edit .......................................................................................................... 223
32.3 SNMP Settings .............................................................................................................................. 224
32.3.1 Global Settings .................................................................................................................. 224
32.3.2 Community Settings .......................................................................................................... 224
32.3.3 Community Add or Edit .................................................................................................... 225
32.3.4 Group Settings ................................................................................................................... 225
32.3.5 Group Add or Edit ............................................................................................................. 226
32.3.6 User Settings ....................................................................................................................... 227
32.3.7 User Add or Edit ................................................................................................................. 228
32.3.8 Trap Settings ....................................................................................................................... 228
32.3.9 Trap Destination ................................................................................................................ 229
32.3.10 Trap Destination Add or Edit .......................................................................................... 230
Table of Contents
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
14
32.4 Error Disable ................................................................................................................................. 231
32.4.1 Error Disable Settings ......................................................................................................... 231
32.5 HTTP/HTTPS ................................................................................................................................... 231
32.5.1 HTTP Settings ...................................................................................................................... 231
32.5.2 HTTPS Settings ..................................................................................................................... 232
32.6 TELNET/SSH ................................................................................................................................... 233
32.6.1 TELNET Settings ................................................................................................................... 233
32.6.2 SSH Settings ........................................................................................................................ 233
32.7 Users Settings ............................................................................................................................... 234
32.7.1 Users .................................................................................................................................... 234
32.7.2 Users Add or Edit ............................................................................................................... 234
32.8 Remote Access Control ............................................................................................................. 235
32.8.1 Global Settings .................................................................................................................. 235
32.8.2 Profile Add or Edit .............................................................................................................. 236
Chapter 33
Maintenance....................................................................................................................................238
33.1 Firmware Upgrade ...................................................................................................................... 238
33.1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 238
33.1.2 Upgrade the firmware from a file on a server ............................................................... 238
33.1.3 Upgrade the firmware from a file on your computer ................................................... 239
33.2 Firmware Management ............................................................................................................. 239
33.2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 239
33.2.2 Select the Active Image .................................................................................................. 240
33.3 Backup a Configuration File ...................................................................................................... 241
33.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 241
33.3.2 Back up configuration or log files to a server ................................................................ 242
33.3.3 Back up configuration or log files to your computer .................................................... 242
33.4 Restore a Configuration File ...................................................................................................... 242
33.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 242
33.4.2 Restore the configuration from a file on a server .......................................................... 243
33.4.3 Restore the configuration from a file on your computer ............................................. 243
33.5 Manage Configuration Files ...................................................................................................... 243
33.5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 243
33.6 Reset to Factory Defaults ........................................................................................................... 244
33.6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 244
33.6.2 Reset the Switch to Factory Defaults .............................................................................. 244
33.7 Network Diagnostics ................................................................................................................... 245
33.7.1 Port Test .............................................................................................................................. 245
33.7.2 IPv4 Ping Test ...................................................................................................................... 245
33.7.3 IPv6 Ping Test ...................................................................................................................... 247
33.7.4 Trace Route ....................................................................................................................... 248
33.8 Reboot ......................................................................................................................................... 249
Table of Contents
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
15
33.8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 249
33.8.2 Reboot the Switch ............................................................................................................ 249
Chapter 34
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................250
34.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ............................................................................... 250
34.2 Switch Access and Login ........................................................................................................... 251
34.3 Switch Configuration .................................................................................................................. 252
Appendix A Customer Support ..................................................................................................... 253
Appendix B Legal Information....................................................................................................... 258
Index.................................................................................................................................................265
16
PART I
User’s Guide
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
17
CHAPTER 1
Getting to Know Your Switch
This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the Switch.
1.1 Introduction
The GS1900 series is a new generation Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) Web-Managed Switch.
1.1.1 Hardware Version Information
The GS1900 series have hardware revisions, and the major changes are:
• For the reset Switch back to factory default function, the RESET button is renamed to RESTORE to align
with the rest of the Zyxel Switches
• For the GS1900-24 / GS1900-24EP / GS1900-24HP / GS1900-48 / GS1900-48HP models, the RESET button
is added to support the reboot Switch function.
To find out the hardware version of your Switch, do the following:
• See the back label on the Switch
Figure 1 Example Back Label
Note: The Rev. information is not shown on the back label of the A1 hardware version of
GS1900 Series models.
• On the Web Configurator, see the Model Name and Revision fields in the Status screen.
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
18
Figure 2 Example Status > Device Information Screen: Model Name and Revision
See the following table to use the back label or the Web Configurator to know the hardware version of
your Switch.
Table 1 GS1900 Series Hardware Version Table
MODEL BACK LABEL (Rev.) WEB CONFIGURATOR
(Model Name + Revision = HARDWARE VERSION)
GS1900-8 None GS1900-8 A1
B1 GS1900-8 B1
GS1900-8HP None GS1900-8HP A1
B1 GS1900-8HP B1
B2 GS1900-8HP B2
GS1900-10HP None GS1900-10HP A1
B1 GS1900-10HP B1
GS1900-16 None GS1900-16 A1
B1 GS1900-16 B1
GS1900-24E None GS1900-24E A1
B1 GS1900-24E B1
GS1900-24EP None GS1900-24EP A1
GS1900-24 None GS1900-24 A1
B1 GS1900-24 B1
GS1900-24HP None GS1900-24HP A1
GS1900-24HPv2 B1 GS1900-24HP B1
GS1900-48 None GS1900-48 A1
B1 GS1900-48 B1
GS1900-48HP None GS1900-48HP A1
GS1900-48HPv2 B1 GS1900-48HP B1
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
19
1.1.2 Hardware Comparison
This User’s Guide covers the following models. See Table 1 on page 18 for hardware version information.
Table 2 GS1900 Series Hardware Comparison Table 1
MODEL GS1900-8 GS1900-8HP GS1900-10HP GS1900-16
HARDWARE
VERSION A1 B1 A1 B1 B2 A1 B1 A1 B1
100/1000 Mbps
Port 8No No16
100/1000 Mbps
PoE Port No 8 8 No
1G SFP Slots
Fiber-optic No No 2 No
Desktop Yes Yes Yes Yes
Wall-mount Yes Yes Yes Yes
Rack-mount No No No Yes
Power ON/OFF
Switch Yes No Yes No Yes No No
Reboot Function No No No No
Reset to Factory
Default Function Yes* Yes** Yes* Yes** Yes* Yes** Yes* Yes**
Note: * Press the RESET button for more than 6 seconds.
** Press the RESTORE button for more than 6 seconds.
PoE MODE
Button No No No No
Kensington Lock No No No No
Power DC Jack-
type DC Pin-type DC
Jack-
type
DC Pin-
type DC Jack-
type AC Input
Table 3 GS1900 Series Hardware Comparison Table 2
MODEL GS1900-24E GS1900-24EP GS1900-24 GS1900-24HP GS1900-48 GS1900-48HP
HARDWARE
VERSION A1 B1 A1 A1 B1 A1 B1 A1 B1 A1 B1
100/1000 Mbps
Port 24 12 24 No 48 24
100/1000 Mbps
PoE Port No 12 No 24 No 24
1G SFP Slots
Fiber-optic No No 2 2 2 2
Desktop Yes No No No No No
Wall-mount Yes No No No No No
Rack-mount Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Power ON/OFF
Switch No No No No No No
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
20
1.2 Example Applications
This section shows a few examples of using the Switch in various network environments. Note that the
Switch in the figure is just an example Switch and not your actual Switch.
1.2.1 PoE Example Application
The Switch can supply PoE (Power over Ethernet) to Powered Devices (PDs) such as an IP camera, a
wireless router, an IP telephone and a general outdoor router that are not within reach of a power
outlet.
Figure 3 PoE Example Application
Reboot Function No Yes* No Yes* No Yes* No Yes* No Yes*
Note: * Press the RESET button.
Reset to Factory
Default Function Yes* Yes** Yes** Yes* Yes** Yes* Yes** Yes* Yes** Yes* Yes**
Note: * Press the RESET button for more than 6 seconds.
** Press the RESTORE button for more than 6 seconds.
PoE MODE
Button No No No No No Yes
Kensington Lock No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes
Power AC Input AC Input AC Input AC Input AC Input AC Input
Table 3 GS1900 Series Hardware Comparison Table 2 (continued)
MODEL GS1900-24E GS1900-24EP GS1900-24 GS1900-24HP GS1900-48 GS1900-48HP
HARDWARE
VERSION A1 B1 A1 A1 B1 A1 B1 A1 B1 A1 B1
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
21
1.2.2 Backbone Example Application
The Switch is an ideal solution for small networks where rapid growth can be expected in the near future.
The Switch can be used standalone for a group of heavy traffic users. You can connect computers and
servers directly to the Switch’s port or connect other switches to the Switch.
All computers can share high-speed applications on the server. To expand the network, simply add
more networking devices such as switches, routers, computers, print servers, and so on.
Figure 4 Backbone Example Application
1.2.3 Bridging or Fiber-optic Uplink Example Application
The Switch connects different company departments (RD and Sales) to the corporate backbone. It can
alleviate bandwidth contention and eliminate server and network bottlenecks. All users that need high
bandwidth can connect to high-speed department servers through the Switch. You can provide a
super-fast uplink connection by using a Gigabit Ethernet or SFP port on the Switch.
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
22
Figure 5 Bridging or Fiber-optic Uplink Example Application
1.2.4 Gigabit Ethernet to the Desktop
The Switch is an ideal solution for small networks which demand high bandwidth for a group of heavy
traffic users. You can connect computers and servers directly to the Switch’s port or connect other
switches to the Switch.
In this example, all computers can share high-speed applications on the server and access the Internet.
To expand the network, simply add more networking devices such as switches, routers, computers, print
servers and so on.
Figure 6 Gigabit to the Desktop
1.2.5 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Application Example
A VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical
networks. Stations on a logical network belong to one or more groups. With VLAN, a station cannot
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
23
directly talk to or hear from stations that are not in the same groups unless such traffic first goes through
a router.
For more information on VLANs, refer to Chapter 9 on page 86.
1.2.5.1 Tag-based VLAN Example
Ports in the same VLAN group share the same frame broadcast domain, therefore increasing network
performance by reducing broadcast traffic. VLAN groups can be modified at any time by adding,
moving or changing ports without any re-cabling.
Shared resources such as a server can be used by all ports in the same VLAN as the server. In the
following figure only ports that need access to the server need to be part of VLAN 1. Ports can belong to
other VLAN groups too.
Figure 7 Shared Server Using VLAN Example
1.2.6 IPv6 Support
IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The increase in
IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP addresses. At the time
of writing, the Switch supports the following features.
• Static address assignment and stateless auto-configuration
• Neighbor Discovery Protocol (a protocol used to discover other IPv6 devices in a network)
• Remote Management using PING, telnet, SNMP, HTTP and TFTP services
• ICMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet processing and perform diagnostic functions, such as
"PING”
• IPv4/IPv6 dual stack; the Switch can run IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time
• DHCPv6 client
1.3 Ways to Manage the Switch
Use any of the following methods to manage the Switch.
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
24
• Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the Switch using a (supported)
web browser. See Chapter 5 on page 50.
• TFTP. Use Trivial File Transfer Protocol for firmware upgrades and configuration backup or restore. See
Section 33.1 on page 238, Section 33.3 on page 241, and Section 33.4 on page 242.
• SNMP. The device can be configured by a SNMP manager. See Section 32.3 on page 224.
• ZON Utility. ZON Utility is a program designed to help you deploy and perform initial setup on a
network more efficiently. See Section 4.1 on page 45.
1.4 Good Habits for Managing the Switch
Do the following things regularly to make the Switch more secure and to manage the Switch more
effectively.
• Change the password. Use a password that is not easy to guess and that consists of different types of
characters, such as numbers and letters.
• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.
• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working
configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your
password, you will have to reset the Switch to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier
configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the Switch. You could simply restore your
last configuration.
Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
25
CHAPTER 2
Hardware Installation and
Connection
This chapter shows you how to install and connect the Switch.
2.1 Safety Precautions
Please observe the following before using the Switch:
• It is recommended to ask an authorized technician to attach the Switch on a desk or to the rack or
wall. Use the proper screws to prevent damage to the Switch. See the Installation Requirements
sections in this chapter to know the types of screws and screwdrivers for each mounting method.
• Make sure there is at least 2 cm of clearance on the top and bottom of the Switch, and at least 5 cm
of clearance on all four sides of the Switch. This allows air circulation for cooling.
• Do NOT block the ventilation holes nor store cables or power cords on the Switch. Allow clearance for
the ventilation holes to prevent your Switch from overheating. This is especially crucial when your
Switch does not have fans. Overheating could affect the performance of your Switch, or even
damage it.
• The surface of the Switch could be hot when it is functioning. Do NOT put your hands on it. You may
get burned. This could happen especially when you are using a fanless Switch.
• The Switches with fans are not suitable for use in locations where children are likely to be present.
To start using the Switch, simply connect the power cables to turn it on.
2.2 Installation Scenarios
This chapter shows you how to install and connect the Switch.
The Switch can be:
• Placed on a desktop.
• Mounted on a wall.
• Rack-mounted on a standard EIA rack.
Note: Ask an authorized technician to attach the Switch to the rack or wall. See the
Installation Requirements sections in this chapter to know the types of screws and
screwdrivers for wall-mounting.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
26
WARNING! Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit.
Make sure you connect the Switch’s power cord to a socket-outlet with
an earthing connection or its equivalent.
WARNING! This Switch is not suitable for use in locations where children
are likely to be present.
See Table 2 on page 19 for the comparison table of the hardware installation methods for each model.
2.3 Desktop Installation Procedure
1Make sure the Switch is clean and dry.
2Set the Switch on a smooth, level surface strong enough to support the weight of the Switch and the
connected cables. Make sure there is a power outlet nearby.
3Make sure there is at least 40 mm of clearance from the bottom to the Switch, and make sure there is
enough clearance around the Switch to allow air circulation and the attachment of cables and the
power cord. This is especially important for enclosed rack installations.
4Remove the adhesive backing from the rubber feet.
5Attach the rubber feet to each corner on the bottom of the Switch. These rubber feet help protect the
Switch from shock or vibration and ensure space between devices when stacking.
Figure 8 Attaching Rubber Feet
Note: Do NOT block the ventilation holes. Leave space between devices when stacking.
Note: For proper ventilation, allow at least 4 inches (10 cm) of clearance at the front and 3.4
inches (8 cm) at the back of the Switch. This is especially important for enclosed rack
installations.
2.4 Wall Mounting
You may need screw anchors if mounting on a concrete or brick wall.
Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
27
2.4.1 Wall-mounted Installation Requirement
The following are the wall-mounted installation requirements:
• Use screws with 6 mm – 8 mm (0.24" – 0.31") wide heads.
• See the following table for how far apart to place the screws.
The following figure shows the screw specifications used for wall mounting.
• D = 7.00 mm
• H = 2.00 mm
• L= 15.50 mm
• d = 3.50 mm
Do the following to attach your Switch to a wall.
1Select a position free of obstructions on a wall strong enough to hold the weight of the Switch.
2Mark two holes on the wall at the appropriate distance apart for the screws.
WARNING! Be careful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside
the wall when drilling holes for the screws.
3If using screw anchors, drill two holes for the screw anchors into the wall. Push the anchors into the full
depth of the holes, then insert the screws into the anchors. Do NOT insert the screws all the way in –
leave a small gap. The gap must be big enough for the screw heads to slide into the screw slots and the
connection cables to run down the back of the Switch.
If not using screw anchors, use a screwdriver to insert the screws into the wall. Do NOT insert the screws
all the way in – leave a gap.
Table 4 Distance between the centers of the holes for wall mounting
GS1900-8 GS1900-8HP GS1900-10HP GS1900-16 GS1900-24E
176 mm 176 mm 176 mm 148 mm 207 mm
Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
28
Note: Make sure the screws are fastened well enough to hold the weight of the Switch with
the connection cables.
4Align the holes on the back of the Switch with the screws on the wall. Hang the Switch on the screws.
Note: Make sure there is enough clearance between the wall and the Switch to allow
ventilation.
The Switch should be wall-mounted horizontally. The Switch's side
panels with ventilation slots should not be facing up or down as this
position is less safe.
2.5 Rack Mounting
The Switch can be mounted on an EIA standard size, 19-inch rack or in a wiring closet with other
equipment. Follow the steps below to mount your Switch on a standard EIA rack using a rack-mounting
kit.
Note: Make sure there is enough clearance between each equipment on the rack for air
circulation.
2.5.1 Rack-mounted Installation Requirement
The following are the rack-mounted installation requirements:
• Two mounting brackets.
• Eight M3 flat head screws and a #2 Philips screwdriver.
• Four M5 flat head screws and a #2 Philips screwdriver.
Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit.
Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
29
2.5.1.1 Precautions
• Make sure the rack will safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it contains.
• Make sure the position of the Switch does not make the rack unstable or top-heavy. Take all
necessary precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit.
2.5.2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch
1Position a mounting bracket on one side of the Switch, lining up the four screw holes on the bracket with
the screw holes on the side of the Switch. See Table 1 on page 18 for hardware version information.
Figure 9 Attaching the Mounting Brackets (GS1900-16 A1/GS1900-16 B1, GS1900-24E A1/GS1900-24E B1,
and GS1900-24EP A1)
Figure 10 Attaching the Mounting Brackets (GS1900-24 A1/GS1900-24 B1, GS1900-24HP A1/GS1900-
24HP B1, GS1900-48 A1/GS1900-48 B1, and GS1900-48HP A1/GS1900-48HP B1)
2Using a #2 Philips screwdriver, install the M3 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into
the Switch.
3Repeat steps 1 and 2 to install the second mounting bracket on the other side of the Switch.
4You may now mount the Switch on a rack. Proceed to the next section.
2.5.3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack
1Position a mounting bracket (that is already attached to the Switch) on one side of the rack, lining up
the two screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the rack. See Table 1 on page 18
for hardware version information.
Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
30
Figure 11 Mounting the Switch on a Rack (GS1900-16 A1/GS1900-16 B1, GS1900-24E A1/GS1900-24E B1,
and GS1900-24EP A1)
Figure 12 Mounting the Switch on a Rack (GS1900-24 A1/GS1900-24 B1, GS1900-24HP A1/GS1900-24HP
B1, GS1900-48 A1/GS1900-48 B1, and GS1900-48HP A1/GS1900-48HP B1)
2Using a #2 Philips screwdriver, install the M5 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into
the rack.
Note: Make sure you tighten all the four screws to prevent the Switch from getting slanted.
3Repeat steps 1 and 2 to attach the second mounting bracket on the other side of the rack.
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
31
CHAPTER 3
Hardware Overview
This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the Switch and shows you how to make the
hardware connections.
3.1 Front Panel Connections
The following figures show the front panels of the Switch. See Table 1 on page 18 for hardware version
information.
Figure 13 Front Panel: GS1900-8 A1
Figure 14 Front Panel: GS1900-8 B1
Figure 15 Front Panel: GS1900-8HP
Figure 16 Front Panel: GS1900-8HP B2
Figure 17 Front Panel: GS1900-10HP A1
A1
B1
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
32
Figure 18 Front Panel: GS1900-10HP B1
Figure 19 Front Panel: GS1900-16 A1
Figure 20 Front Panel: GS1900-16 B1
Figure 21 Front Panel: GS1900-24E A1
Figure 22 Front Panel: GS1900-24E B1
Figure 23 Front Panel: GS1900-24EP A1
Figure 24 Front Panel: GS1900-24 A1
Figure 25 Front Panel: GS1900-24 B1
Figure 26 Front Panel: GS1900-24HP A1
Figure 27 Front Panel: GS1900-24HP B1
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
33
Figure 28 Front Panel: GS1900-48 A1
Figure 29 Front Panel: GS1900-48 B1
Figure 30 Front Panel: GS1900-48HP A1
Figure 31 Front Panel: GS1900-48HP B1
3.1.1 Ethernet Ports
The Switch has 1000Base-T auto-negotiating, auto-crossover Ethernet ports. In 10/100/1000 Mbps Gigabit
Ethernet, the speed can be 10Mbps, 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps. The duplex mode can be both half or full
duplex at 100 Mbps and full duplex only at 1000 Mbps.
An auto-negotiating port can detect and adjust to the optimum Ethernet speed (10/100/1000 Mbps)
and duplex mode (full duplex or half duplex) of the connected device.
An auto-crossover (auto-MDI/MDI-X) port automatically works with a straight-through or crossover
Ethernet cable.
3.1.1.1 Default Ethernet Settings
The factory default negotiation settings for the Ethernet ports on the Switch are:
• Speed: Auto
•Duplex: Auto
• Flow control: Off
3.1.2 SFP Slots
These are slots for Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) transceivers. A transceiver is a single unit that
houses a transmitter and a receiver. Use a transceiver to connect a fiber-optic cable to the Switch. The
Switch does not come with transceivers. You must use transceivers that comply with the Small Form-
Factor Pluggable (SFP) Transceiver MultiSource Agreement (MSA). See the SFF committee’s INF-8074i
specification Rev 1.0 for details.
You can change transceivers while the Switch is operating. You can use different transceivers to
connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber-optic connectors.
• Type: SFP connection interface
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
34
• Connection speed: 1 Gigabit per second (Gbps)
WARNING! To avoid possible eye injury, do not look into an operating
fiber-optic module’s connectors.
HANDLING! All transceivers are static sensitive. To prevent damage from
electrostatic discharge (ESD), it is recommended you attach an ESD
preventive wrist strap to your wrist and to a bare metal surface when
you install or remove a transceiver.
STORAGE! All modules are dust sensitive. When not in use, always keep
the dust plug on. Avoid getting dust and other contaminant into the
optical bores, as the optics do not work correctly when obstructed with
dust.
3.1.2.1 Transceiver Installation
Use the following steps to install a transceiver.
1Attach an ESD preventive wrist strap to your wrist and to a bare metal surface.
2Align the transceiver in front of the slot opening.
3Make sure the latch is in the lock position (latch styles vary), then insert the transceiver into the slot with
the exposed section of PCB board facing down.
4Press the transceiver firmly until it clicks into place.
5The Switch automatically detects the installed transceiver. Check the LEDs to verify that it is functioning
properly.
6Remove the dust plugs from the transceiver and cables (dust plug styles vary).
7Identify the signal transmission direction of the fiber-optic cables and the transceiver. Insert the fiber-
optic cable into the transceiver.
Figure 32 Latch in the Lock Position
Figure 33 Transceiver Installation Example
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
35
Figure 34 Connecting the Fiber-optic Cables
3.1.2.2 Transceiver Removal
Use the following steps to remove an SFP transceiver.
1Attach an ESD preventive wrist strap to your wrist and to a bare metal surface on the chassis.
2Remove the fiber-optic cables from the transceiver.
3Pull out the latch and down to unlock the transceiver (latch styles vary).
Note: Make sure the transceiver’s latch is pushed all the way down, so the transceiver can be
pulled out successfully.
4Pull the latch, or use your thumb and index finger to grasp the tabs on both sides of the transceiver, and
carefully slide it out of the slot.
Note: Do NOT pull the transceiver out by force. You could damage it. If the transceiver will not
slide out, grasp the tabs on both sides of the transceiver with a slight up or down motion
and carefully slide it out of the slot. If unsuccessful, contact Zyxel Support to prevent
damage to your Switch and transceiver.
5Insert the dust plug into the ports on the transceiver and the cables.
Figure 35 Removing the Fiber-optic Cables
Figure 36 Opening the Transceiver’s Latch Example
Figure 37 Transceiver Removal Example
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
36
3.1.3 PoE Mode Button
Push or release the PoE MODE button to change how the Ethernet port’s Link/ACT LED works.
• Each Ethernet port’s LED is changed to act as a PoE MODE LED by pushing the PoE MODE button on
the front panel. The PoE LED lights green when PoE mode is enabled.
• Each Ethernet port’s LED is changed back to act as a Link/ACT LED by releasing the PoE MODE button
on the front panel. The PoE LED is off when PoE mode is disabled.
Figure 38 PoE LED and PoE MODE Button: GS1900-48HP A1
Figure 39 PoE LED and PoE MODE Button: GS1900-48HP B1
View the GS1900-48HP A1 / GS1900-48HP B1 LEDs to ensure proper functioning of the Switch and as an
aid in troubleshooting (see Table 8 on page 42). See Table 1 on page 18 for hardware version
information.
3.2 Rear Panel
The following figures show the rear panels of the Switch. See Table 1 on page 18 for hardware version
information.
Figure 40 Rear Panel: GS1900-8 A1
Figure 41 Rear Panel: GS1900-8 B1
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
37
Figure 42 Rear Panel: GS1900-8HP
Figure 43 Rear Panel: GS1900-8HP B2
Figure 44 Rear Panel: GS1900-10HP A1
Figure 45 Rear Panel: GS1900-10HP B1
Figure 46 Rear Panel: GS1900-16 A1
Figure 47 Rear Panel: GS1900-16 B1
Figure 48 Rear Panel: GS1900-24E A1
Figure 49 Rear Panel: GS1900-24E B1
B1
A1
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
38
Figure 50 Rear Panel: GS1900-24EP A1
Figure 51 Rear Panel: GS1900-24 A1
Figure 52 Rear Panel: GS1900-24 B1
Figure 53 Rear Panel: GS1900-24HP A1
Figure 54 Rear Panel: GS1900-24HP B1
Figure 55 Rear Panel: GS1900-48 A1
Figure 56 Rear Panel: GS1900-48 B1
Figure 57 Rear Panel: GS1900-48HP A1
Figure 58 Rear Panel: GS1900-48HP B1
3.2.1 Grounding
Grounding is a safety measure to direct excess electric charge to the ground. It prevents damage to
the Switch, and protects you from electrocution. Use the grounding screw on the rear panel and the
ground wire of the AC power supply to ground the Switch.
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
39
The grounding terminal and AC power ground where you install the Switch must follow your country’s
regulations. Qualified service personnel must ensure the building’s protective earthing terminals are
valid terminals.
Installation of Ethernet cables must be separate from AC power lines. To avoid electric surge and
electromagnetic interference, use a different electrical conduit or raceway (tube/trough or enclosed
conduit for protecting electric wiring) that is 15 cm apart, or as specified by your country’s electrical
regulations.
Any device that is located outdoors and connected to this product must be properly grounded and
surge protected. To the extent permissible by your country’s applicable law, failure to follow these
guidelines could result in damage to your Switch which may not be covered by its warranty.
Note: The specification for surge or ESD protection assumes that the Switch is properly
grounded.
1Remove the M4 ground screw from the Switch’s rear panel.
2Secure a green or yellow ground cable (16 AWG or smaller) to the Switch's rear panel using the M4
ground screw.
Figure 59 Grounding
3Attach the other end of the ground cable to a grounding bar located on the rack where you install the
Switch or to an on-site grounding terminal.
Figure 60 Attach Ground Cable to Grounding Bar or On-site Grounding Terminal
4The grounding terminal of the server rack or on-site grounding terminal must also be grounded and
connected to the building’s main grounding electrode. Make sure the grounding terminal is connected
to the buildings grounding electrode and has an earth resistance of less than 10 ohms, or according to
your country’s electrical regulations.
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
40
Figure 61 Connecting to the Building’s Main Grounding Electrode
If you are uncertain that suitable grounding is available, contact the appropriate electrical inspection
authority or an electrician.
This device must be grounded. Do this before you make other
connections.
3.2.2 Power Connection
Make sure you are using the correct power source and that no objects obstruct the airflow of the fans.
The Switch uses two power supply modules, one of which is redundant, so if one power module fails the
system can operate on the remaining module.
Rear Panel Power Connection
Connect one end of the supplied power cord or power adapter to the power receptacle on the back
of the Switch and the other end to the appropriate power source.
For Switches with a power switch (see Table 2 on page 19), use the POWER ON/OFF switch to have the
Switch power on or off.
Connecting the Power
Use the following procedures to connect the Switch to a power source after you have installed it in a
rack.
Note: Use the included power cord for the AC power connection.
1Connect the female end of the power cord to the AC power socket.
2Connect the other end of the cord to a power outlet.
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
41
Disconnecting the Power
The power input connectors can be disconnected from the power source individually.
1Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet.
2Disconnect the power cord from the AC power socket.
3.3 LEDs
After you connect the power to the Switch, view the LEDs to ensure proper functioning of the Switch
and as an aid in troubleshooting. See Table 1 on page 18 for hardware version information.
Table 5 LED Descriptions
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
PWR Green On The system is turned on.
Off The system is off or has failed.
SYS Green On The system is on and functioning properly.
Blinking The system is rebooting and performing self-diagnostic tests.
Off The power is off or the system is not ready or malfunctioning.
Ethernet Ports
LNK/ACT Green Blinking The system is transmitting/receiving to/from a 100/1000 Mbps Ethernet
network.
On The link to a 100/1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up.
Off The link to an Ethernet network is down.
PoE
(see Section
3.1.3 on page
36)
Green On Power is supplied to all PoE Ethernet ports.
Off There is no power supplied.
1G SFP Slots (Fiber-optic Ports – see Section 1.1 on page 17)
LNK/ACT Green Blinking The system is transmitting/receiving to/from a 100/1000 Mbps fiber-optic
network.
On The link to a 100/1000 Mbps fiber-optic network is up.
Off The link to a fiber-optic network is down.
Table 6 LED Descriptions (GS1900-8HP B1 and GS1900-10HP A1/GS1900-10HP B1 Only)
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
PWR Green On The system is turned on.
Off The system is off or has failed.
SYS Green On The system is on and functioning properly.
Blinking The system is rebooting.
Red On There is a system error.
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
42
PoE 10/100/1000Base-T Ports (1 – 8), 2 LEDs per port
Right Amber On The port is in PoE AF mode. That is, the Switch is following the IEEE
802.3af standard to supply power to this port.
Green On The port is in PoE AT mode. That is, the Switch is following the IEEE
802.3at standard to supply power to this port.
Off Power is not supplied to this port.
Left Amber On The link to a 10/100 Mbps Ethernet network is up.
Blinking The system is transmitting/receiving to/from a 10/100 Mbps fiber-optic
network.
Green On The link to a 1 Gbps Ethernet network is up.
Blinking The system is transmitting/receiving to/from 1 Gbps Ethernet network.
Table 7 LED Descriptions for SFP Port (GS1900-10HP A1/GS1900-10HP B1 Only)
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
Two arrow LEDs for 1G SFP Slots (Fiber-optic Ports)
right/left arrows Amber On The link to a 100 Mbps fiber-optic network is up.
Blinking The system is transmitting/receiving to/from a 100 Mbps fiber-optic
network.
Green On The link to a 1 Gbps fiber-optic network is up.
Blinking The system is transmitting/receiving to/from 1 Gbps fiber-optic network.
Table 8 LED Descriptions (GS1900-48HP A1/GS1900-48HP B1 Only)
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
Ethernet Ports when PoE MODE button is OFF
PoE
(see Section
3.1.3 on page
36)
Off Each Ethernet port’s LED acts as a Link/ACT LED.
Table 6 LED Descriptions (GS1900-8HP B1 and GS1900-10HP A1/GS1900-10HP B1 Only) (continued)
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
RightLeft
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
43
3.4 Resetting the Switch
If you lock yourself (and others) from the Switch, or you forget your password, or cannot access the Web
Configurator, you will need to reload the factory-default configuration file.
• For the A1 hardware version, use the RESET button.
• For the B1 and later hardware version, use the RESTORE button.
To check which hardware version you are using, refer to Section 1.1.1 on page 17.
This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the default Switch IP address,
user name and password will be reset to 192.168.1.1, admin and 1234 respectively.
Follow the steps below to reset the Switch back to factory defaults.
1Make sure the SYS LED is steady green (not blinking). Use a pointed instrument such as a pin to access
the RESET/RESTORE buttons on the front of the Switch as shown in Section 3.1 on page 31.
2Press the button for more than 6 seconds. After releasing the button, the SYS LED begins to blink. Wait for
the Switch to restart (the SYS LED will be steady green again). This takes up to 2 minutes. See Section 3.3
on page 41 for more information about the LED behavior.
Note: If you want to access the Switch Web Configurator again, you may need to change
the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default Switch
IP address (192.168.1.1).
LNK/ACT Green Blinking The system is transmitting/receiving to/from a 100/1000 Mbps Ethernet
network.
On The link to a 100/1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up.
Off The link to an Ethernet network is down.
Ethernet Ports when PoE MODE button is ON
PoE Green On Each Ethernet port’s LED acts as a PoE MODE LED.
PoE Mode Amber On The port is in PoE AF mode. That is, the Switch is following the IEEE
802.3af standard to supply power to this port.
Green On The port is in PoE AT mode. That is, the Switch is following the IEEE
802.3at standard to supply power to this port.
Off Power is not supplied to this port.
1G SFP Slots (Fiber-optic Ports – see Section 1.1 on page 17)
LNK/ACT Green Blinking The system is transmitting/receiving to/from a 100/1000 Mbps fiber-optic
network.
On The link to a 100/1000 Mbps fiber-optic network is up.
Off The link to a fiber-optic network is down.
Table 8 LED Descriptions (GS1900-48HP A1/GS1900-48HP B1 Only) (continued)
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
44
3.5 Rebooting the Switch
Use any of the following methods to reboot the Switch without turning the power off.
•RESET button. Refer to Table 2 on page 19 and Table 3 on page 19 to see the list of models that
support the RESET button to reboot the Switch. See Section 3.3 on page 41 for more information about
the LED behavior.
• Web Configurator. Click the Reboot button in the Maintenance > Reboot screen. See Section 33.8 on
page 249 for more information.
• ZON Utility. Click the Reboot Device button in the ZON Utility screen. See Section 4.1.2 on page 46 for
more information.
Chapter 4 ZON Utility
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
45
CHAPTER 4
ZON Utility
This chapter describes the screens for ZON Utility.
4.1 Zyxel One Network (ZON) Utility
ZON Utility is a program designed to help you deploy and manage a network more efficiently. It detects
devices automatically and allows you to do basic settings on devices in the network without having to
be near it.
The ZON Utility issues requests through Zyxel Discovery Protocol (ZDP) and in response to the query, the
device responds back with basic information including IP address, firmware version, location, system
and model name in the same broadcast domain. The information is then displayed in the ZON Utility
screen and you can perform tasks like basic configuration of the devices and batch firmware upgrade
in it. You can download the ZON Utility at www.zyxel.com and install it in a computer (Windows
operating system).
4.1.1 Requirements
Before installing the ZON Utility on your computer, please make sure it meets the requirements listed
below.
Operating System
At the time of writing, the ZON Utility is compatible with:
• Windows 7 (both 32-bit / 64-bit versions)
• Windows 8 (both 32-bit / 64-bit versions)
• Windows 8.1 (both 32-bit / 64-bit versions)
• Window 10 (both 32-bit / 64-bit versions)
Note: To check for your Windows operating system version, right-click on My Computer >
Properties. You should see this information in the General tab.
Hardware
Here are the minimum hardware requirements to use the ZON Utility on your PC.
• Core i3 processor
•2 GB RAM
Chapter 4 ZON Utility
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
46
• 100 MB free hard disk
• WXGA (Wide XGA 1280 by 800)
4.1.2 Run the ZON Utility
1Double-click the ZON Utility to run it.
2The first time you run the ZON Utility, you will see if your device and firmware version support the ZON
Utility. Click the OK button to close this screen.
Figure 62 Supported Devices and Versions
If you want to check the supported models and firmware versions later, you can click the Show
information about ZON icon in the upper right hand corner of the screen. Then select the Supported
model and firmware version link. If your device is not listed here, see the device release notes for ZON
utility support. The release notes are in the firmware zip file on the Zyxel web site.
Chapter 4 ZON Utility
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
47
Figure 63 ZON Utility Screen
3Select a network adapter to which your supported devices are connected.
Figure 64 Network Adapter
4Click the Go button for the ZON Utility to discover all supported devices in your network.
Figure 65 Discovery
5The ZON Utility screen shows the devices discovered.
Chapter 4 ZON Utility
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
48
Figure 66 ZON Utility Screen
6Select a device and then use the icons to perform actions. Some functions may not be available for
your devices.
Note: You must know the selected device admin password before taking actions on the
device using the ZON Utility icons.
Figure 67 Password Prompt
The following table describes the icons numbered from left to right in the ZON Utility screen.
12345678910 11 12 13
Table 9 ZON Utility Icons
ICON DESCRIPTION
1 IP configuration Change the selected device’s IP address.
2 Renew IP Address Update a DHCP-assigned dynamic IP address.
3 Reboot Device Use this icon to restart the selected devices. This may be useful when troubleshooting
or upgrading new firmware.
4 Reset Configuration to
Default
If you forget your password or cannot access the Web Configurator, you can use this
icon to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all
configurations that you had previously.
5 Locator LED Use this icon to locate the selected device by causing its Locator LED to blink.
6 Web GUI Use this to access the selected device web configurator from your browser. You will
need a user name and password to log in.
7 Firmware Upgrade Use this icon to upgrade new firmware to selected devices of the same model. Make
sure you have downloaded the firmware from the Zyxel website to your computer and
unzipped it in advance.
8 Change Password Use this icon to change the admin password of the selected device. You must know
the current admin password before changing to a new one.
Chapter 4 ZON Utility
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
49
The following table describes the fields in the ZON Utility main screen.
9 Configure NCC
Discovery
You must have Internet access to use this feature. Use this icon to enable or disable the
Nebula Control Center (NCC) discovery feature on the selected device. If it is
enabled, the selected device will try to connect to the NCC. Once the selected
device is connected to and has registered in the NCC, it will go into the Nebula cloud
management mode.
10 ZAC Use this icon to run the Zyxel AP Configurator of the selected AP.
11 Clear and Rescan Use this icon to clear the list and discover all devices on the connected network again.
12 Save Configuration Use this icon to save configuration changes to permanent memory on a selected
device.
13 Settings Use this icon to select a network adapter for the computer on which the ZON utility is
installed, and the utility language.
Table 10 ZON Utility Fields
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Type This field displays an icon of the kind of device discovered.
Model This field displays the model name of the discovered device.
Firmware Version This field displays the firmware version of the discovered device.
MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of the discovered device.
IP Address This field displays the IP address of an internal interface on the discovered device that first
received an ZDP discovery request from the ZON Utility.
System Name This field displays the system name of the discovered device.
Location This field displays where the discovered device is.
Status This field displays whether changes to the discovered device have been done
successfully. As the Switch does not support IP Configuration, Renew IP address and Flash
Locator LED, this field displays “Update failed”, “Not support Renew IP address” and “Not
support Flash Locator LED” respectively.
NCC Discovery This field displays if the discovered device supports the Nebula Control Center (NCC)
discovery feature. If it is enabled, the selected device will try to connect to the NCC.
Once the selected device is connected to and has registered in the NCC, it will go into
the Nebula cloud management mode.
Serial Number Enter the admin password of the discovered device to display its serial number.
Hardware Version This field displays the hardware version of the discovered device.
Table 9 ZON Utility Icons (continued)
ICON DESCRIPTION
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
50
CHAPTER 5
Web Configurator
5.1 Overview
This section introduces the configuration and functions of the Web Configurator.
The Web Configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy Switch setup and
management through Internet browser. Use a browser that supports HTML5, such as Microsoft Edge,
Internet Explorer 11, Mozilla Firefox, or Google Chrome. The recommended minimum screen resolution is
1024 by 768 pixels.
In order to use the Web Configurator, you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows
• JavaScript (enabled by default)
• Java permissions (enabled by default)
5.2 Access
1Make sure your Switch hardware is properly connected. See the Quick Start Guide.
2Browse to https://192.168.1.1. The Login screen appears.
Figure 68 Login Screen
3Enter the user name (default: “admin”) and password (default: “1234”).
Chapter 5 Web Configurator
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
51
4Click Login. If you logged in using the default user name and password, getting start appears. The
Getting Started screen appears every time you log in using the default user name and default password.
5If you did not change the default administrator password and/or SNMP community values, a warning
screen displays each time you log into the Web Configurator. Click Password / SNMP to open a screen
where you can change the administrator and SNMP passwords simultaneously. Otherwise, click Ignore
to close it.
Figure 69 Web Configurator: Warning
Figure 70 Web Configurator: Password
Change the default administrator and/or SNMP passwords, and then click Apply to save your changes.
Table 11 Web Configurator: Password > Users/SNMP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Users
Use this section to set the admin login password.
User This is the default administrator account with the “admin” user name. You cannot change the
default administrator user name.
Old Password Type the existing system password (1234 is the default password when shipped).
New Password Enter your new system password using the keyboard characters ("a – z", "A – Z", "0 – 9",
~!@#$%^&*()_+`–={}[]:;<>./\). The allowed string length is 1 to 64.
New Password
Confirm
Re-enter your new system password for confirmation.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the password section afresh.
Chapter 5 Web Configurator
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
52
5.3 Navigating the Web Configurator
The following summarizes how to navigate the Web Configurator from the Getting Started screen. This
guide uses the GS1900-10HP and GS1900-24HP screens as an example. The screens may vary slightly for
different models.
Figure 71 Web Configurator’s Main Screen
The Web Configurator’s main screen is divided into these parts:
•A – Title Bar
•B – Navigation Panel
•C – Main Window
5.3.1 Title Bar
The title bar provides some useful links that always appear over the screens below, regardless of how
deep into the Web Configurator you navigate.
Figure 72 Title Bar
SNMP
Use this section to specify the SNMP community and access right values.
Community Enter a string identifying the community name that this entry should belong to. The allowed
string length is 1 to 20, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Access Right Select the access mode for this entry. The possible values are Read-Only and Read-Write.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 11 Web Configurator: Password > Users/SNMP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 Web Configurator
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
53
The icons provide the following functions.
Click Logout in a screen to exit the Web Configurator. You have to log in with your password again after
you log out. This is recommended after you finish a management session for security reasons.
5.3.2 Navigation Panel
Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure Switch features. The following
sections introduce the Switch’s navigation panel menus and their screens.
Figure 73 Navigation Panel
Getting Started
Getting Started displays general device information, system status, system resource usage, and
interface status.
For details on Getting Started features, see Chapter 6 on page 61.
Table 12 Title Bar: Web Configurator Icons
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Refresh Click Refresh to reload the page.
Save Click this to apply your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Status Click this to display basic information about the Switch.
Logout Click this to log out of the Web Configurator.
Help Click this to open the help page for the current screen.
Chapter 5 Web Configurator
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
54
Monitor Menu
The monitor menu screens display status and statistics information.
Table 13 Monitor Menu Screens Summary
FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION
System This link takes you to a screen where you can see general identification
information for the Switch.
IP IPv4 This link takes you to a screen where you can see an IPv4 interface and
the IPv4 settings on the Switch.
IPv6 This link takes you to a screen where you can see an IPv6 interface and
the IPv6 settings on the Switch.
Information This link takes you to a screen that displays general system information:
system name, system location, and system contact.
Port This link takes you to screens where you can see speed, flow control and
priority settings of individual Switch ports.
Port Status This link takes you to a screen to view the statistics of individual Switch
ports.
Port Counters This link takes you to a screen to view the interface, port 1 interface mib
counters, port 1 etherlike mib counters, port 1 RMON mib counters
settings of individual Switch ports.
Bandwidth
Utilization
This link takes you to a screen to view the Tx and Rx bandwidth utilization
of individual Switch ports.
PoE This link takes you to a screen to view the current amount of power that
PDs are receiving from the Switch.
Bandwidth
Management This link takes you to a screen to view the egress global burst and port
rate for individual Switch ports.
Storm Control This link takes you to a screen that displays broadcast filters.
VLAN This link takes you to screens where you can see port-based or 802.1Q
VLAN (depending on what you configured in the Switch Setup menu).
You can also see a protocol based VLAN or a subnet based VLAN in
these screens.
VLAN VLAN This link takes you to a screen to view the Switch’s VLAN settings.
Port This link takes you to a screen to view the Switch’s port setting in VLAN.
VLAN Port This link takes you to a screen to view the Switch’s VLAN port settings.
Guest VLAN This link takes you to a screen to view the Switch’s guest VLAN settings.
Voice VLAN This link takes you to a screen to view the Switch’s global and port voice
VLAN settings for voice traffic.
MAC Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC address and
VLAN ID of a device attach to a port. You can also view what kind of
MAC address it is.
Link Aggregation This link takes you to screen where you can view aggregate physical
links to form one logical, higher-bandwidth link.
Loop Guard This link takes you to a screen where you can view protection against
network loops that occur on the edge of your network.
Multicast This link takes you to screen where you can view various multicast
features, IGMP snooping and create multicast VLANs.
Chapter 5 Web Configurator
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
55
Configuration Menu
Use the configuration menu screens to configure the Switch’s features.
IGMP VLAN This link takes you to a screen to view the Switch’s IGMP VLAN status.
Statistics This link takes you to a screen to view the Switch’s IGMP statistics.
Group This link takes you to a screen to view the Switch’s IGMP group
information.
Router This link takes you to a screen to view the Switch’s IGMP router
information.
Spanning Tree This link takes you to screens where you can view CIST, MST, STP
preventing network loops.
CIST This link takes you to a screen to view the Switch’s spanning tree CIST
instance.
CIST Port This link takes you to a screen to view the Switch’s spanning tree CIST
port status.
MST This link takes you to a screen to view the Switch’s spanning tree MST
instance status.
MST Port This link takes you to a screen to view the Switch’s spanning tree MST port
status.
STP Statistics This link takes you to a screen to view the Switch’s spanning tree STP
statistics.
LLDP This link takes you to screens where you can view the LLDP settings.
Statistics This link takes you to a screen to view the Switch’s LLDP global and port
statistics.
Remote
Information
This link takes you to a screen to view the Switch’s LLDP remote device
information.
Overloading This link takes you to a screen to view the Switch’s LLDP port overloading
status.
Security This link takes you to screens where you can view the port security and
802.1X settings.
Port Security This link takes you to a screen to view the Switch’s port security status.
802.1X Port This link takes you to a screen to view the Switch’s 802.1X port status.
Authenticated
Hosts
This link takes you to a screen to view the Switch’s 802.1X security
authenticated host status.
Management This link takes you to screens where you can view the syslog and error
disable status.
Syslog This link takes you to a screen to view the Switch’s logging filter settings
and system logs.
Error Disable This link takes you to a screen to view the Switch’s global and port error
disable status.
Table 14 Configuration Menu Screens Summary
FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION
System This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general
identification information and time settings for the Switch.
Table 13 Monitor Menu Screens Summary (continued)
FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION
Chapter 5 Web Configurator
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
56
IP IPv4 This link takes you to a screen where you can enable an IPv4 interface
and configure the IPv4 settings on the Switch.
IPv6 This link takes you to a screen where you can enable an IPv6 interface
and configure the IPv6 settings on the Switch.
Time System Time This link takes you to a screen to configure the time of the system.
SNTP Server This link takes you to a screen to configure the SNTP server settings.
Information This link takes you to a screen that configures general system
information: system name, system location, and system contact.
Port This link takes you to screens where you can configure speed, flow
control and priority settings for individual Switch ports.
Port This link takes you to a screen to view the Switch’s port settings and
select individual Switch ports for configuration.
EEE This link takes you to a screen to view the Switch’s port EEE (Energy-
Efficient Ethernet) state and select ports for configuration.
PoE Global This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the global
settings for the Switch to supply power over Ethernet (PoE).
Port This link takes you to a screen where you can configure port PoE settings.
Bandwidth
Management This link takes you to a screen where you can view and configure the
egress global burst and port rate.
Storm Control This link takes you to a screen to set up broadcast filters.
VLAN This link takes you to screens where you can configure VLAN, guest
VLAN, and voice VLAN settings.
VLAN VLAN This link takes you to a screen where you can view and add/edit the
VLAN settings.
Port This link takes you to a screen where you can view port settings and
select VLANs for configuration.
VLAN Port This link takes you to a screen where you can view and configure the
VLAN port settings.
Guest VLAN Global This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the global guest
VLAN settings.
Port This link takes you to a screen where you can view the guest VLAN port
settings and select VLAN ports for configuration.
Voice VLAN Global This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the global voice
VLAN settings.
OUI This link takes you to a screen where you can view and edit/delete the
OUI settings.
Port This link takes you to a screen where you can view the voice VLAN port
settings and select a port for configuration.
MAC Table This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the MAC
address and VLAN ID of a device attach to a port. You can also
configure what kind of MAC address it is.
Static MAC This link takes you to screens where you can configure static MAC
addresses for a port. These static MAC addresses do not age out.
Filtering MAC This link takes you to a screen to set up filtering rules.
Dynamic Age This link takes you to a screen where you can enter the dynamic MAC
aging time.
Table 14 Configuration Menu Screens Summary (continued)
FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION
Chapter 5 Web Configurator
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
57
Link Aggregation This link takes you to a screen where you can logically aggregate
physical links to form one logical, higher-bandwidth link.
Global This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the global link
aggregation settings.
LAG
Management
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the LAG
management settings.
LAG Port This link takes you to a screen where you can view or edit the LAG port
settings.
LACP Port This link takes you to a screen where you can view or edit the LACP port
settings.
Loop Guard This link takes you to screens where you can configure protection
against network loops that occur on the edge of your network.
Global This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the global loop
guard settings.
Port This link takes you to a screen where you can view or edit the port’s loop
guard settings.
Mirror This link takes you to a screen where you can copy traffic from one port
or ports to another port. This allowing you to examine the traffic from the
first port without interference.
Time Range Group This link takes you to a screen where you can view/define/delete time
range (schedule) rules.
Multicast This link takes you to a screen where you can configure various multicast
features, IGMP snooping and create multicast VLANs.
IGMP Global This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the IGMP global
settings.
VLAN This link takes you to a screen where you can view or edit the IGMP VLAN
settings.
Router Port This link takes you to a screen where you can add or view the router port
settings.
Profile This link takes you to a screen where you can add or view the IGMP
profile settings.
Throttling This link takes you to a screen where you can view or edit the throttling
settings.
Spanning Tree This link takes you to screens where you can configure the RSTP/MRSTP/
MSTP to prevent network loops.
Global This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the global
settings.
STP Port This link takes you to a screen where you can view or edit the STP port
settings.
CIST This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the CIST settings.
CIST Port This link takes you to a screen where you can view or edit the CIST port
settings.
MST This link takes you to a screen where you can add/edit/delete the MST
instance settings.
MST Port This link takes you to a screen where you can view or edit the MST port
settings.
Table 14 Configuration Menu Screens Summary (continued)
FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION
Chapter 5 Web Configurator
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
58
LLDP This link takes you to screens where you can configure the global, port,
local information, MED network policy, and MED port settings.
Global This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the global LLDP
settings.
Port This link takes you to a screen where you can view or edit the LLDP port
settings.
Local
Information
This link takes you to a screen where you can view or edit the LLDP local
information settings.
MED Network
Policy
This link takes you to a screen where you can add/edit/delete the LLDP
MED network policy settings.
MED Port This link takes you to a screen where you can view or edit the LLDP MED
port settings.
QoS This link takes you to screens where you can configure the general and
trust mode settings.
General Port This link takes you to a screen where you can view or edit the QoS port
settings.
Queue This link takes you to a screen where you can configure queuing with
associated queue weights for each port.
CoS Mapping This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the CoS to
queue mapping and Queue to CoS mapping settings.
DSCP
Mapping
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the DSCP to
queue and queue to DSCP mapping settings.
IP Precedence
Mapping
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the IP
precedence to queue and queue to IP precedence mapping settings.
Trust Mode Global This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the global trust
mode setting.
Port This link takes you to a screen where you can view or edit the QoS port
trust mode setting.
Security This link takes you to screens where you can configure the port security,
port isolation, 802.1X and DoS settings.
Port Security Global This link takes you to a screen where you can enable the global port
security.
Port This link takes you to a screen where you can view or edit the port’s
security settings.
Port Isolation This link takes you to a screen where you can view the state or enable/
disable port isolation.
802.1X Global This link takes you to a screen where you can enable the global 802.1X
security setting.
Port This link takes you to a screen where you can view or edit the 802.1X port
security settings.
DoS Global This link takes you to a screen where you can enable Denial of Service
(DoS).
Port This link takes you to a screen where you can view or edit the Switch’s
port DoS state.
AAA This link takes you to a screen where you can view authentication,
authorization and accounting services through external servers. The
external servers can be either RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In
User Service) or TACACS+ (Terminal Access Controller Access-Control
System Plus).
Table 14 Configuration Menu Screens Summary (continued)
FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION
Chapter 5 Web Configurator
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
59
Auth Method This link takes you to a screen where you can add/edit/delete an
authentication method.
RADIUS This link takes you to a screen where you can add/edit/delete RADIUS
server settings.
TACACS+ This link takes you to a screen where you can add/edit/delete TACACS+
server settings.
Management This link takes you to screens where you can configure the syslog, SNMP,
error disable, HTTP/HTTPS, users and remote access control.
Syslog Global This link takes you to a screen where you can enable syslog (system
logging).
Local This link takes you to a screen where you can add/edit/delete the local
syslog settings.
Remote This link takes you to a screen where you can add/edit/delete the
remote syslog settings.
SNMP Global This link takes you to a screen where you can enable SNMP (Simple
Network Management Protocol).
Community This link takes you to a screen where you can add/delete the SNMP
community settings.
Group This link takes you to a screen where you can add/edit/delete the SNMP
group settings.
User This link takes you to a screen where you can add/edit/delete the SNMP
users’ settings.
Trap This link takes you to a screen where you can enable the SNMP traps.
Trap
Destination
This link takes you to a screen where you can add/edit/delete the SNMP
trap host settings.
Error Disable This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the error disable
settings.
HTTP/HTTPS HTTP This link takes you to a screen where you can enable and configure the
management HTTP settings.
HTTPS This link takes you to a screen where you can enable and configure the
management HTTPS settings.
TELNET/SSH TELNET This link takes you to a screen where you can enable remote Telnet
access.
SSH This link takes you to a screen where you can enable SSH connection.
Users This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the
management users’ settings.
Remote Access
Control This link takes you to a screen where you can enable remote access
control and add/edit/delete profile settings.
Table 14 Configuration Menu Screens Summary (continued)
FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION
Chapter 5 Web Configurator
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
60
Maintenance Menu
Use the maintenance menu screens to manage configuration and firmware files, run diagnostics, and
reboot or shut down the Switch.
Table 15 Maintenance Menu Screens Summary
FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION
Firmware Upload This link takes you to a screen where you can manage the firmware
upload settings.
Management This link takes you to a screen where you can view the active/backup
firmware image information and activate an image.
Configuration Backup This link takes you to a screen where you can backup your current
Switch configuration and log files to a server or as a local file to your
computer.
Restore This link takes you to a screen where you can restore a previously saved
configuration from a server or your computer.
Management This link takes you to a screen where you can replace the startup and
backup configuration files.
Factory
Default
This link takes you to a screen where you can reset the Switch back to
factory default settings.
Diagnostics This link takes you to screens where you can view system logs and test
ports.
Port Test This link takes you to a screen where you can perform an internal loop-
back test on an Ethernet port.
PING IPv4 This link takes you to a screen where you can ping an IPv4 server.
IPv6 This link takes you to a screen where you can ping an IPv6 server.
Trace Route This link takes you to a screen where you can print the route that IP
packets take to a network host.
Reboot This link takes you to a screen where you can restart the Switch without
turning the power off.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
61
CHAPTER 6
Getting Started
6.1 Overview
Use the Getting Started screens to check status information about the Switch.
6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The main Getting Started screen (Section 6.2 on page 61) displays the Switch’s general device
information, system status, system resource usage, and interface status. You can also display other status
screens for more information.
6.2 Getting Started
This screen is the first thing you see when you log into the Switch. It also appears every time you click the
Getting Started icon in the navigation panel. The Getting Started displays general device information,
system status, system resource usage, and interface status in widgets.
Figure 74 Getting Started
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 16 Getting Started
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval (A) Use the drop-box to select: None, 5 seconds, 10 seconds, 15 seconds, 20 seconds, 25
seconds, or 30 seconds.
Virtual Device Displays an image of the Switch.
Chapter 6 Getting Started
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
62
6.2.1 Wizard
Wizard displays start up, VLAN, QoS, and link aggregation.
For details on Wizard features, see system Chapter 7 on page 74, VLAN Chapter 9 on page 86, QoS
Chapter 29 on page 198, and link aggregation Chapter 11 on page 95.
Start up
In start up, you can set up IP or DNS, set up your user name or password, and view finished results.
In order to set up your IP or DNS, please do the following. Click Getting Started > Start up > 1 Step 1 Set up
IP to access this screen.
Wizard Displays the following links: Start up, VLAN, QoS, and Link aggregation.
Device Information
System Name This field displays the name used to identify the Switch on any network.
Model Name This field displays the model name of this Switch.
Revision This field displays the hardware revision number of this Switch.
Serial Number This field displays the serial number of this Switch.
MAC Address
Range This field displays the MAC addresses used by the Switch. Each physical port or wireless
radio has one MAC address. The first MAC address is assigned to the Ethernet LAN port, the
second MAC address is assigned to the first radio, and so on.
Firmware Version This field displays the version number and date of the firmware the Switch is currently
running.
System Up Time This field displays how long the Switch has been running since it last restarted or was turned
on.
Current Date/
Time This field displays the current date and time in the Switch. The format is hh:mm:ss yyyy-mm-
dd.
CPU Usage This field displays the Switch’s recent CPU usage.
Memory Usage This field displays the Switch’s recent memory usage.
Table 16 Getting Started (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Getting Started
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
63
Figure 75 Getting Started > Start up > 1 Step 1 Set up IP
Each field is described in the following table.
After clicking Next, the set up your user name screen appears.
Table 17 Getting Started > Start up > 1 Step 1 Set up IP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Host Name This field displays a host name.
IP Address The Switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network. The factory default
IP address is 192.168.1.1.
Subnet Mask The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address.
The factory default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
Gateway Type the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation, for
example 192.168.1.254.
DNS DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address
and vice versa. Enter a domain name server IP address in order to be able to use a domain
name instead of an IP address.
NTP (Network Time
Protocol)
This field displays the NTP time servers from which the Switch gets the time and date.
Next Click Next to show the next screen.
Chapter 6 Getting Started
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
64
Figure 76 Getting Started > Start up > 2 Step 2 Set up user name/password
Each field is described in the following table.
After clicking Next, the finish screen appears.
Table 18 Getting Started > Start up > 2 Step 2 Set up user name/password
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Username The default user name is admin and associated default password is 1234. Enter a user name
using the keyboard characters ("a – z", "A – Z", "0 – 9", ~!@#$%^&*()_+`–={}[]:;<>./\) for the
user. The allowed string length is 1 to 32.
Password The default user name is admin and associated default password is 1234. Enter a new
password using the keyboard characters ("a – z", "A – Z", "0 – 9", ~!@#$%^&*()_+`–={}[]:;<>./\)
for the user. The allowed string length is 1 to 64.
Previous Click Previous to show the previous screen.
Next Click Next to show the next screen.
Chapter 6 Getting Started
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
65
Figure 77 Getting Started > Start up > 3 Step 3 Finish
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 19 Getting Started > Start up > 3 Step 3 Finish
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Host Name This field displays a host name.
IP Address The Switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network. The factory default
IP address is 192.168.1.1.
Subnet Mask The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address.
The factory default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
Gateway Type the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation, for
example 192.168.1.254.
DNS DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address
and vice versa. Enter a domain name server IP address in order to be able to use a domain
name instead of an IP address.
NTP (Network Time
Protocol)
This field displays the NTP time servers from which the Switch gets the time and date.
Username The default user name is admin and associated default password is 1234.
Password The default user name is admin and associated default password is 1234.
Previous Click Previous to show the previous screen.
Finish Review the information and click Finish to create the task.
Chapter 6 Getting Started
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
66
VLAN
In VLAN, you can create VLAN, tag VLAN setting, and view finished results.
In order to create VLAN, please do the following. Click Getting Started > VLAN > 1 Step 1 Create VLAN to
access this screen.
Figure 78 Getting Started > VLAN > 1 Step 1 Create VLAN
Each field is described in the following table.
After clicking Next, the tag VLAN setting screen appears.
Table 20 Getting Started > VLAN > 1 Step 1 Create VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Create VLAN ID (1–
4094)
Type a number between 1 and 4094 to create a VLAN ID.
Edit VLAN ID Select from the drop-box a VLAN ID.
Next Click Next to show the next screen.
Chapter 6 Getting Started
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
67
Figure 79 Getting Started > VLAN > 2 Step 2 Tag VLAN Setting
Each field is described in the following table.
After clicking Next, the finish screen appears.
Table 21 Getting Started > VLAN > 2 Step 2 Tag VLAN Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Currently VLAN ID This field displays the VLAN identification number.
Tag Ports belonging to the specified VLAN tag all outgoing frames transmitted.
Untag Ports belonging to the specified VLAN do not tag all outgoing frames transmitted.
Previous Click Previous to show the previous screen.
Next Click Next to show the next screen.
Chapter 6 Getting Started
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
68
Figure 80 Getting Started > VLAN> 3 Step 3 Finish
Each field is described in the following table.
QoS
In QoS, you can create QoS settings, and view finished results.
In order to create QoS settings, please do the following. Click Getting Started > QoS > 1 Step 1 QoS
(Quality of Service) to access this screen.
Table 22 Getting Started > VLAN > 3 Step 3 Finish
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Currently VLAN ID This field displays the VLAN identification number.
Tag Ports belonging to the specified VLAN tag all outgoing frames transmitted.
Untag Ports belonging to the specified VLAN do not tag all outgoing frames transmitted.
Previous Click Previous to show the previous screen.
Finish Review the information and click Finish to create the task.
Chapter 6 Getting Started
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
69
Figure 81 Getting Started > QoS > 1 Step 1 QoS (Quality of Service)
Each field is described in the following table.
After clicking Next, the finish screen appears.
Table 23 Getting Started > QoS > 1 Step 1 QoS (Quality of Service)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Highest Click and drag icons located on the left to desired preference.
Medium Click and drag icons located on the left to desired preference.
Low Click and drag icons located on the left to desired preference.
Next Click Next to show the next screen.
Chapter 6 Getting Started
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
70
Figure 82 Getting Started > QoS > 2 Step 2 Finish
Each field is described in the following table.
Link Aggregation
In link aggregation, you can link aggregation and view finished results.
In order to create link aggregation settings, please do the following. Click Getting Started > Link
aggregation > 1 Step 1 Link aggregation to access this screen.
Table 24 Getting Started > QoS > 2 Step 2 Finish
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Highest Displays summary results.
Medium Displays summary results.
Low Displays summary results.
Previous Click Previous to show the previous screen.
Finish Review the information and click Finish to create the task.
Chapter 6 Getting Started
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
71
Figure 83 Getting Started > Link aggregation > 1 Step 1 Link aggregation
Each field is described in the following table.
After clicking Next, the finish screen appears.
Table 25 Getting Started > Link aggregation > 1 Step 1 Link aggregation
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Group 1 Click and drag icons located on the left to desired preference.
Group 2 Click and drag icons located on the left to desired preference.
Group 3 Click and drag icons located on the left to desired preference.
Group 4 Click and drag icons located on the left to desired preference.
Group 5 Click and drag icons located on the left to desired preference.
Group 6 Click and drag icons located on the left to desired preference.
Group 7 Click and drag icons located on the left to desired preference.
Group 8 Click and drag icons located on the left to desired preference.
Next Click Next to show the next screen.
Chapter 6 Getting Started
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
72
Figure 84 Getting Started > Link aggregation > 2 Step 2 Finish
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 26 Getting Started > Link aggregation > 2 Step 2 Finish
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Group 1 Displays summary results.
Group 2 Displays summary results.
Group 3 Displays summary results.
Group 4 Displays summary results.
Group 5 Displays summary results.
Group 6 Displays summary results.
Group 7 Displays summary results.
Group 8 Displays summary results.
Previous Click Previous to show the previous screen.
Finish Review the information and click Finish to create the task.
73
PART II
Technical Reference
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
74
CHAPTER 7
Monitor: System
7.1 Overview
This section provides information for System in Monitor. Use the System screens to view general Switch
settings.
7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The IP screen (Section 7.2 on page 74) displays IPv4 and IPv6.
• The Information screen (Section 7.3 on page 75) displays the system information.
7.2 IP Settings
The Switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network. The factory default IP address is
192.168.1.1. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. The factory default
subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
7.2.1 IPv4 Settings
Use this screen to view the Switch’s IPv4 information. Click Monitor > System > IP > IPv4 to open this
screen.
Figure 85 Monitor > System > IP > IPv4
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 27 Monitor > System > IP > IPv4
LABEL DESCRIPTION
DHCP State This field displays the state of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132
(DHCP).
IP Address This field displays IP address of the Switch in the IP domain.
Chapter 7 Monitor: System
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
75
7.2.2 IPv6 Settings
Use this screen to view the Switch’s IPv6 information. Click Monitor > System > IP > IPv6 to open this
screen.
Figure 86 Monitor > System > IP > IPv6
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
7.3 Information
In the navigation panel, click Monitor > System > Information > System Information to display the screen
as shown. You can view system information.
Figure 87 Monitor > System > Information > System Information
Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask of the Switch in the IP domain.
Gateway This field displays the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation, for
example 192.168.1.254.
DNS Server 1 DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and
vice versa. This field displays a domain name server IP address, enabling the use of a domain.
DNS Server 2 DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and
vice versa. This field displays a domain name server IP address, enabling the use of a domain.
Management
VLAN
This field displays the management VLAN.
Table 27 Monitor > System > IP > IPv4 (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 28 Monitor > System > IP > IPv6
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Auto
Configuration
This field displays auto configuration.
IPv6 Address This field displays IP address of the Switch in the IP domain.
IPv6 Gateway This field displays the IP address of the default outgoing gateway.
DHCPv6 Client This field displays the Switch’s DHCP settings when it is acting as a DHCPv6 client.
Chapter 7 Monitor: System
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
76
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 29 Monitor > System > Information > System Information
LABEL DESCRIPTION
System Name This field displays the descriptive name of the Switch for identification purposes.
System Location This field displays the geographic location of the Switch for identification purposes.
System Contact This field displays the person in charge of the Switch for identification purposes.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
77
CHAPTER 8
Monitor: Port
8.1 Overview
This section provides information for Port in Monitor. Use the Port screens to view general Switch port
settings.
8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The Port screen (Section 8.2 on page 77) displays status, port counters, and bandwidth utilization.
• The PoE screen (Section 8.3 on page 81) displays PoE.
• The Bandwidth Management screen (Section 8.4 on page 83) displays bandwidth control.
• The Storm Control screen (Section 8.5 on page 84) displays port settings of the Switch.
8.2 Port Settings
Use this screen to view Switch port settings.
8.2.1 Status
Use this screen to view the Switch’s port statistics. Click Monitor > Port > Port > Status to access this screen.
Figure 88 Monitor > Port > Port > Status
Chapter 8 Monitor: Port
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
78
Each field is described in the following table.
8.2.2 Port Counters
Use this screen to view the Switch’s port counters settings. Click Monitor > Port > Port > Port Counters to
access this screen.
Figure 89 Monitor > Port > Port > Port Counters (Port 1 Interface mib Counters)
Table 30 Monitor > Port > Port > Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This is the port index number.
Port Name A descriptive name that identifies this port.
State This is port admin setting state.
Link Status This field displays Up, Down or Not Present. It displays Up when the port is linked up or Down
when it is not. When no any physical port is binding with this group, it displays Not Present.
Speed View the speed of the Ethernet connection on this port.
Duplex View the duplex mode of the Ethernet connection on this port.
FlowCtrl Status A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer
memory causing packet discards and frame losses. Flow Control is used to regulate
transmission of signals to match the bandwidth of the receiving port.
Type View the type on this port.
Chapter 8 Monitor: Port
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
79
Figure 90 Monitor > Port > Port > Port Counters (Port 1 Etherlike mib Counters)
Figure 91 Monitor > Port > Port > Port Counters (Port 1 RMON mib Counters)
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 31 Monitor > Port > Port > Port Counters
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Counters
Port This field displays the port.
Mode This field displays the mode.
Port 1 Interface mib Counters
iflnOctets This field displays the iflnOctets.
iflnUcastPkts This field displays the iflnUcastPkts.
iflnNUcastPkts This field displays the iflnNUcastPkts.
ifInDiscards This field displays the ifInDiscards.
ifOutOctets This field displays the ifOutOctets.
ifOutUcastPkts This field displays the ifOutUcastPkts.
ifOutNUcastPkts This field displays the ifOutNUcastPkts.
ifOutDiscards This field displays the ifOutDiscards.
ifInMulticastPkts This field displays the ifInMulticastPkts.
ifInBroadcastPkts This field displays the ifInBroadcastPkts.
Chapter 8 Monitor: Port
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
80
8.2.3 Bandwidth Utilization
Utilization is the percentage of a network's bandwidth that is currently being consumed by network
traffic. Each vertical bar represents the highest utilization on a port, and can be either transmitted (Tx)
traffic or received (Rx) traffic during the last time interval in seconds.
Use this screen to view the Switch’s bandwidth utilization settings. Click Monitor > Port > Port > Bandwidth
Utilization to access this screen.
ifOutMulticastPkts This field displays the ifOutMulticastPkts.
ifOutBroadcastPkts This field displays the ifOutBroadcastPkts.
Port 1 Etherlike mib Counters
dot3StatsAlignmentErrors This field displays the dot3StatsAlignmentErrors.
dot3StatsFCSErrors This field displays the dot3StatsFCSErrors.
dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames This field displays the dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames.
dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames This field displays the dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames.
dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions This field displays the dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions.
dot3StatsLateCollisions This field displays the dot3StatsLateCollisions.
dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions This field displays the dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions.
dot3StatsFrameTooLongs This field displays the dot3StatsFrameTooLongs.
dot3StatsSymbolErrors This field displays the dot3StatsSymbolErrors.
dot3ControlInUnkownOpcodes This field displays the dot3ControlInUnkownOpcodes.
dot3lInPauseFrames This field displays the dot3lInPauseFrames.
dot3lOutPauseFrames This field displays the dot3lOutPauseFrames.
Port 1 RMON mib Counters
etherStatsDropEvents This field displays the etherStatsDropEvents.
etherStatsOctets This field displays the etherStatsOctets.
etherStatsPkts This field displays the etherStatsPkts.
etherStatsBroadcastPkts This field displays the etherStatsBroadcastPkts.
etherStatsMulticastPkts This field displays the etherStatsMulticastPkts.
etherStatsCRCAlignErrors This field displays the etherStatsCRCAlignErrors.
etherStatsUnderSizePkts This field displays the etherStatsUnderSizePkts.
etherStatsOverSizePkts This field displays the etherStatsOverSizePkts.
etherStatsFragments This field displays the etherStatsFragments.
etherStatsJabbers This field displays the etherStatsJabbers.
etherStatsCollisions This field displays the etherStatsCollisions.
etherStatsPkts64Octets This field displays the etherStatsPkts64Octets.
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets This field displays the etherStatsPkts65to127Octets.
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets This field displays the etherStatsPkts128to255Octets.
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets This field displays the etherStatsPkts256to511Octets.
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets This field displays the etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets.
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets This field displays the etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets.
Table 31 Monitor > Port > Port > Port Counters (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Monitor: Port
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
81
Figure 92 Monitor > Port > Port > Bandwidth Utilization
Each field is described in the following table.
8.3 PoE Settings
Note: The PoE function and the following screens are available for models ending in “HP”
only.
The Switch supports both the IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet (PoE) and IEEE 802.3at High Power over
Ethernet (PoE) standards. The Switch is Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE) because it provides a source of
power through its Ethernet ports, and each device that receives power through an Ethernet port is a
Table 32 Monitor > Port > Port > Bandwidth Utilization
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Bandwidth Utilization
1Gbps This field displays the 1 Gbps.
100Mbps This field displays the 100 Mbps.
10Mbps This field displays the 10 Mbps.
Link down This field displays the link down.
Refresh period This field displays the refresh period.
IFG This field displays the IFG.
Tx Transmitted (Tx) traffic during the last time interval in seconds.
Rx Received (Rx) traffic during the time interval in seconds.
Chapter 8 Monitor: Port
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
82
Powered Device (PD).
In the figure below, the IP camera and IP phone get their power directly from the Switch. Aside from
minimizing the need for cables and wires, PoE removes the hassle of trying to find a nearby electric
outlet to power up devices.
Figure 93 Powered Device Examples
You can also set priorities so that the Switch is able to reserve and allocate power to certain PDs.
Note: The PoE devices that supply or receive power and their connected Ethernet cables
must all be completely indoors.
To view the current amount of power that PDs are receiving from the Switch, click Monitor > Port > PoE.
Figure 94 Monitor > Port > PoE
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 33 Monitor > Port > PoE
LABEL DESCRIPTION
PoE Mode This field displays the power management mode used by the Switch, whether it is in
Classification or Consumption mode.
Total Power(W) This field displays the total power the Switch can provide to the connected PoE-enabled
devices on the PoE ports. The total power of GS1900-10HP is 77 W and GS1900-8HP is 70 W.
Consuming
Power(W)
This field displays the total amount of power the Switch is currently supplying to the
connected PoE-enabled devices.
Allocated Power(W) This field displays the total amount of power the Switch (in Classification mode) has
reserved for PoE after negotiating with the connected PoE devices. It shows NA when the
Switch is in Consumption mode.
Consuming Power (W) can be less than or equal but not more than the Allocated Power
(W).
Remaining Power(W) This field displays the amount of power the Switch can still provide for PoE.
Note: The Switch must have at least 16 W of remaining power in order to supply power to a
PoE device, even if the PoE device needs less than 16 W.
Chapter 8 Monitor: Port
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
83
8.4 Bandwidth Management
This section shows you the maximum bandwidth using the Bandwidth Management screen. Bandwidth
management shows the maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and/or out-going traffic flows on
a port.
8.4.1 Bandwidth Control
Use this screen to view the Switch’s bandwidth control in egress global burst and port rate.
An egress port is an outgoing port, that is, a port through which a data packet leaves for both ports. An
ingress port is an incoming port, that is, a port through which a data packet enters.
Click Monitor > Port > Bandwidth Management > Bandwidth Control to access this screen.
Figure 95 Monitor > Port > Bandwidth Management > Bandwidth Control
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 34 Monitor > Port > Bandwidth Management > Bandwidth Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Bandwidth Control
Egress Global
Burst This field specifies the current egress burst size in bytes all ports.
Port Rate View the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second (Kbps) for the traffic flow on a
port.
Port This field displays the port number.
Chapter 8 Monitor: Port
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
84
8.5 Storm Control
This section shows you the storm control feature.
Storm control limits the number of broadcast, multicast and unicast packets the Switch receives per
second on the ports. When the maximum number of allowable broadcast, multicast and/or unicast
packets is reached per second, the subsequent packets are discarded. Enabling this feature reduces
broadcast, multicast and/or unicast packets in your network. You can specify limits for each packet
type on each port.
Click Monitor > Port > Storm Control to access this screen.
Figure 96 Monitor > Port > Storm Control
Ingress RateLimit
(Kbps) View the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second (Kbps) for the incoming traffic
flow on a port.
Egress RateLimit
(Kbps) View the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second (Kbps) for the out-going traffic
flow on a port.
Table 34 Monitor > Port > Bandwidth Management > Bandwidth Control (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Monitor: Port
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
85
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 35 Monitor > Port > Storm Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Storm Control
Port This field displays the port number.
State This field displays the state.
Broadcast (pps) Displays how many broadcast packets the port receives (in pps).
Unknown
Multicast (pps) Displays how many unknown multicast packets the port receives (in pps).
Unknown Unicast
(pps) Displays how many unknown unicast packets the port receives (in pps).
Action Displays the action the device takes when a limit is reached. The following options are
available:
• Drop – drop the packet.
• Shutdown – shutdown the connection.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
86
CHAPTER 9
Monitor: VLAN
9.1 Overview
This section provides information for VLAN in Monitor.
A VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical
networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one
group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same groups;
the traffic must first go through a router.
In MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the
subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network
resources of another on the same LAN, therefore a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another
user on the same network.
VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable
logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets go to each and
every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain.
9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The VLAN screen (Section 9.2 on page 86) displays VLAN, port, and VLAN port settings.
• The Guest VLAN screen (Section 9.3 on page 89) displays the global and port settings of the Switch.
• The Voice VLAN screen (Section 9.4 on page 90) displays the global and port settings of the Switch.
9.2 VLAN Settings
Use this screen to view Switch VLAN settings.
9.2.1 VLAN
Use this screen to view the Switch’s VLAN settings. Click Monitor > VLAN > VLAN > VLAN to access this
screen.
Figure 97 Monitor > VLAN > VLAN > VLAN
Chapter 9 Monitor: VLAN
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
87
Each field is described in the following table.
9.2.2 Port
Use this screen to view the Switch’s port setting in VLAN. Click Monitor > VLAN > VLAN > Port to access
this screen.
Figure 98 Monitor > VLAN > VLAN > Port
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 36 Monitor > VLAN > VLAN > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN
VLAN ID This is the VLAN identification number.
VLAN Name Displays a descriptive name for the VLAN for identification purposes.
VLAN Type Displays a type for the VLAN for identification purposes.
Table 37 Monitor > VLAN > VLAN > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Port This field displays the port number.
PVID This is the port VLAN identification number.
A PVID (Port VLAN ID) is a tag that adds to incoming untagged frames received on a port
so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines.
Chapter 9 Monitor: VLAN
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
88
9.2.3 VLAN Port
Port-based VLANs are VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC
address and its associated port. Port-based VLANs require allowed outgoing ports to be defined for
each port. Therefore, if you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other, for example,
between conference rooms in a hotel, you must define the egress (an egress port is an outgoing port,
that is, a port through which a data packet leaves) for both ports. Port-based VLANs are specific only to
the Switch on which they were created.
Use this screen to view the Switch’s VLAN port settings. Click Monitor > VLAN > VLAN > VLAN Port to
access this screen.
Figure 99 Monitor > VLAN > VLAN > VLAN Port
Accept Frame
Type This field displays the type that is accepted by the frame.
Specifies the type of frames allowed on a port. Choices are All, Tag Only and Untag Only.
All accepts all untagged or tagged frames on this port. This is the default setting. Tag Only
accepts only tagged frames on this port. All untagged frames will be dropped. Untag Only
accepts only untagged frames on this port. All tagged frames will be dropped.
Ingress Filter If set, the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not have this port as a
member.
VLAN Trunks Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers (but not ports directly
connected to end users) to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass
through the Switch.
Table 37 Monitor > VLAN > VLAN > Port (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 9 Monitor: VLAN
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
89
Each field is described in the following table.
9.3 Guest VLAN
When 802.1x port authentication is enabled on the Switch and its ports, clients that do not have the
correct credentials are blocked from using the ports. You can configure your Switch to have one VLAN
that acts as a guest VLAN. If you enable the guest VLAN (102 in the example) on a port (2 in the
example), the user (A in the example) that is not IEEE 802.1x capable or fails to enter the correct user
name and password can still access the port, but traffic from the user is forwarded to the guest VLAN.
That is, unauthenticated users can have access to limited network resources in the same guest VLAN,
such as the Internet. The rights granted to the Guest VLAN depends on how the network administrator
configures switches or routers with the guest network feature.
Figure 100 Guest VLAN Example
Use this screen to view the Switch’s guest VLAN. Click Monitor > VLAN > Guest VLAN to access this
screen.
Table 38 Monitor > VLAN > VLAN > VLAN Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Port
VLAN ID This is the VLAN identification number.
Port Displays the port index value.
Membership Displays the status of the VLAN group: Forbidden, Excluded, Tagged or Untagged.
Chapter 9 Monitor: VLAN
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
90
Figure 101 Monitor > VLAN > Guest VLAN
Each field is described in the following table.
9.4 Voice VLAN
Voice VLANs are VLANs configured specially for voice traffic. By adding the ports connected with voice
devices to voice VLANs, you can have voice traffic transmitted within voice VLANs and perform QoS-
related configuration for voice traffic as required, therefore ensuring the transmission priority of voice
traffic and voice quality.
Use this screen to view Switch global and port voice VLAN settings for voice traffic. Click Monitor > VLAN
> Voice VLAN to access this screen.
Table 39 Monitor > VLAN > Guest VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Guest VLAN
State This field displays the state of global guest VLAN.
Port
Port This field displays a port number.
State This field displays the state of a port.
In Guest VLAN This field displays the status of the port, is the port is in guest VLAN or not.
Chapter 9 Monitor: VLAN
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
91
Figure 102 Monitor > VLAN > Voice VLAN
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 40 Monitor > VLAN > Voice VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Voice VLAN
State This field displays the state of a port.
Voice VLAN ID This is the voice VLAN identification number.
Cos/802.1p This displays the packet’s 802.1p priority field.
Remark Cos/802.1p This field displays the state of the cos/802.1p.
Aging Time (30-65536 min) Displays the time interval (from 30 to 65536) in minutes.
Port
Port This field displays a port number.
State This field displays the state of a port.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
92
CHAPTER 10
Monitor: MAC Table
10.1 Overview
This section provides information for MAC Table in Monitor.
The MAC Table screen (a MAC table is also known as a filtering database) shows how frames are
forwarded or filtered across the Switch’s ports. When a device (which may belong to a VLAN group)
sends a packet which is forwarded to a port on the Switch, the MAC address of the device is shown on
the Switch’s MAC Table. It also shows whether the MAC address is dynamic (learned by the Switch) or
static (manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen).
The Switch uses the MAC Table to determine how to forward frames. See the following figure.
1The Switch examines a received frame and learns the port from which this source MAC address came.
2The Switch checks to see if the frame's destination MAC address matches a source MAC address
already learned in the MAC Table.
• If the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address, then it forwards the frame to that port.
• If the Switch has not already learned the port for this MAC address, then the frame is flooded to all
ports. Too much port flooding leads to network congestion.
• If the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address, but the destination port is the same as
the port it came in on, then it filters the frame.
Figure 103 MAC Table Flowchart
This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC address and VLAN ID of a device attach to
a port. You can also view what kind of MAC address it is.
Chapter 10 Monitor: MAC Table
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
93
10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The MAC Table screen (Section 10.2 on page 93) displays view filter and MAC table of the Switch.
10.2 MAC Table
Use this screen to view filter static and MAC table settings. Click Monitor > MAC Table to access this
screen.
Figure 104 Monitor > MAC Table
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 41 Monitor > MAC Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MAC Table
MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came.
VLAN Displays a type for the VLAN for identification purposes.
Port This is the port from which the above MAC address was learned.
View This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC address and VLAN ID of a
device attach to a port. You can also view what kind of MAC address it is.
Clear Click Clear to return the fields to the factory defaults.
MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came.
VLAN Displays a type for the VLAN for identification purposes.
Chapter 10 Monitor: MAC Table
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
94
Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic (learned by the Switch) or static (manually
entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen).
Port This is the port from which the above MAC address was learned.
Total Entries Displays the number of total entries.
Table 41 Monitor > MAC Table (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
95
CHAPTER 11
Monitor: Link Aggregation
11.1 Overview
This section provides information for Link Aggregation in Monitor.
Link aggregation (trunking) is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher-capacity link. You
may want to trunk ports if for example, it is cheaper to use multiple lower-speed links than to under-utilize
a high-speed, but more costly, single-port link. However, the more ports you aggregate then the fewer
available ports you have. A trunk group is one logical link containing multiple ports.
The Switch supports both static and dynamic link aggregation.
Note: In a properly planned network, it is recommended to implement static link aggregation
only. This ensures increased network stability and control over the trunk groups on your
Switch.
11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The Link Aggregation screen (Section 11.2 on page 95) displays link aggregation status.
11.2 Link Aggregation
Use the Link Aggregation screens to view Switch link aggregation status. Click Monitor > Link
Aggregation to access this screen.
Figure 105 Monitor > Link Aggregation
Chapter 11 Monitor: Link Aggregation
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
96
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 42 Monitor > Link Aggregation
LABEL DESCRIPTION
LAG Displays the link aggregation status index value.
Name This field displays the name.
Type This field displays the type.
Link Status This field displays the status of the link. It displays Up when the port is linked up or Down when
it is not. When no any physical port is binding with this group, it displays NotPresent.
Active Member Displays if this member is an active member of a trunk.
Standby Member Displays if this member is an standby member of a trunk.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
97
CHAPTER 12
Monitor: Loop Guard
12.1 Overview
This section provides information for Loop Guard in Monitor.
Loop guard is designed to handle loop problems on the edge of your network. This can occur when a
port is connected to a Switch that is in a loop state. Loop state occurs as a result of human error. It
happens when two ports on a switch are connected with the same cable. When a switch in loop state
sends out broadcast messages the messages loop back to the switch and are re-broadcast again and
again causing a broadcast storm.
If a switch (not in loop state) connects to a switch in loop state, then it will be affected by the switch in
loop state in the following way:
• It will receive broadcast messages sent out from the switch in loop state.
• It will receive its own broadcast messages that it sends out as they loop back. It will then re-broadcast
those messages again.
The following figure shows port N on switch A connected to switch B. Switch B is in loop state. When
broadcast or multicast packets leave port N and reach switch B, they are sent back to port N on A as
they are rebroadcast from B.
Figure 106 Switch in Loop State
The loop guard feature checks to see if a loop guard enabled port is connected to a switch in loop
state. This is accomplished by periodically sending a probe packet and seeing if the packet returns on
the same port. If this is the case, the Switch will shut down the port connected to the switch in loop state.
The following figure shows a loop guard enabled port N on switch A sending a probe packet P to switch
B. Since switch B is in loop state, the probe packet P returns to port N on A. The Switch then shuts down
port N to ensure that the rest of the network is not affected by the switch in loop state.
Chapter 12 Monitor: Loop Guard
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
98
Figure 107 Loop Guard – Probe Packet
The Switch also shuts down port N if the probe packet returns to switch A on any other port. In other
words loop guard also protects against standard network loops. The following figure illustrates three
switches forming a loop. A sample path of the loop guard probe packet is also shown. In this example,
the probe packet is sent from port N and returns on another port. As long as loop guard is enabled on
port N. The Switch will shut down port N if it detects that the probe packet has returned to the Switch.
Figure 108 Loop Guard – Network Loop
12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The Loop Guard screen (Section 12.2 on page 98) displays loop guard status.
12.2 Loop Guard
Use the Loop Guard screen to view Switch loop guard status. Click Monitor > Loop Guard to access this
screen.
Chapter 12 Monitor: Loop Guard
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
99
Figure 109 Monitor > Loop Guard
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 43 Monitor > Loop Guard
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Loop Guard
Port This field displays a port number.
Status This field displays the status.
Time Left (sec) This field displays the amount of time left in seconds.
Action This field displays the action.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
100
CHAPTER 13
Monitor: Multicast
13.1 Overview
This section provides information for Multicast in Monitor.
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways – Unicast (1 sender to 1 recipient) or
Broadcast (1 sender to everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts
on the network.
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership
in an IPv4 multicast group – it is not used to carry user data. Refer to RFC 1112, RFC 2236 and RFC 3376 for
information on IGMP versions 1, 2 and 3 respectively.
13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The IGMP screen (Section 13.2 on page 100) displays VLAN, statistics, group, and router.
13.2 IGMP Settings
Use this screen to view Switch various multicast features.
13.2.1 VLAN
Use this screen to view the Switch’s IGMP VLAN. Click Monitor > Multicast > IGMP > VLAN to access this
screen.
Figure 110 Monitor > Multicast > IGMP > VLAN
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 44 Monitor > Multicast > IGMP > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IGMP Vlan
VLAN ID Displays the identification for the VLAN.
Operate Status Displays the status of the operation.
Chapter 13 Monitor: Multicast
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
101
13.2.2 Statistics
Use this screen to view the Switch’s IGMP statistics. Click Monitor > Multicast > IGMP > Statistics to access
this screen.
Figure 111 Monitor > Multicast > IGMP > Statistics
Each field is described in the following table.
Router Ports Auto
Learn
Displays whether the router ports are auto learn or not.
Query
Retry Displays the number of retry.
Interval Displays the number (in seconds) for the time interval.
Max. Response
Interval (sec) Displays the maximum response (in seconds) for the time interval.
Last Member Query
Count Displays the number of count.
Interval (sec) Displays the in seconds for the time interval.
Querier Allows the Switch to send IGMP General Query messages to the VLANs with the multicast
hosts attached.
Status This field displays the entry as querier or non-querier.
Version This field displays the entry querier version.
IP This field displays the entry querier IP address.
Total Entries This field displays the number of total entries.
Table 44 Monitor > Multicast > IGMP > VLAN (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 45 Monitor > Multicast > IGMP > Statistics
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IGMP Statistics
Port This field displays a port number.
Total RX This field displays the total amount of RX.
Chapter 13 Monitor: Multicast
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
102
In the Action column, the Action option allows you to clear the statistics.
Click OK and confirm at the pop-up screen to complete the task. Click Cancel and confirm at the pop-
up screen to discard the changes.
Figure 112 Monitor > Multicast > IGMP > Statistics > Action
13.2.3 Group
Use this screen to view the Switch’s IGMP group. Click Monitor > Multicast > IGMP > Group to access this
screen.
Figure 113 Monitor > Multicast > IGMP > Group
Valid RX This field displays the total amount of valid RX.
Invalid RX This field displays the total amount of invalid RX.
Other RX This field displays the total amount of other RX.
Leave RX This field displays the total amount of leave RX.
Report RX This field displays the total amount of report RX.
General Query RX This field displays the total amount of general query RX.
Group-Spec Query RX This field displays the total amount of group-spec query RX.
Source-Spec Query RX This field displays the total amount of source-spec query RX.
Leave TX This field displays the total amount of leave TX.
Report TX This field displays the total amount of report TX.
General Query TX This field displays the total amount of general query TX.
Group-Spec Query TX This field displays the total amount of group-spec query TX.
Source-Spec Query TX This field displays the total amount of source-spec query TX.
Action Click Action to reset the statistics of the specific field back to zero.
Clear Click Clear to clear statistics on this port.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Refresh Click Refresh to reload the page.
Table 45 Monitor > Multicast > IGMP > Statistics (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 13 Monitor: Multicast
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
103
Each field is described in the following table.
13.2.4 Router
Use this screen to view the Switch’s IGMP router. Click Monitor > Multicast > IGMP > Router to access this
screen.
Figure 114 Monitor > Multicast > IGMP > Router
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 46 Monitor > Multicast > IGMP > Group
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IGMP Group
VLAN ID Displays the identification for the VLAN.
Group IP Address This field displays the group IP address.
Member Ports This field displays the member ports.
Life(sec) Displays life in seconds for the time interval.
Total Entries This field displays the number of total entries.
Clear Click Clear to delete the dynamic groups.
Refresh Click Refresh to reload the page.
Table 47 Monitor > Multicast > IGMP > Router
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IGMP Router
VLAN ID Displays the identification for the VLAN.
Dynamic Router Ports This field displays the dynamic router ports.
Static Router Ports This field displays the static router ports.
Forbidden Router Ports This field displays the forbidden router ports.
Total Entries This field displays the number of total entries.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
104
CHAPTER 14
Monitor: Spanning Tree
14.1 Overview
This section provides information for Spanning Tree in Monitor.
The Switch supports Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST), and
Multiple Spanning Tree (MST).
14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The Spanning Tree screen (Section 14.2 on page 104) displays CIST, CIST port, MST, MST port, STP statistics.
14.2 Spanning Tree
Use this screen to view Switch spanning tree settings.
14.2.1 CIST Settings
Use this screen to view the Switch’s spanning tree CIST instance. Click Monitor > Spanning Tree > CIST to
access this screen.
Figure 115 Monitor > Spanning Tree > CIST
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 48 Monitor > Spanning Tree > CIST
LABEL DESCRIPTION
CIST Instance
State This field displays the state.
Chapter 14 Monitor: Spanning Tree
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
105
14.2.2 CIST Port
Use this screen to view the Switch’s spanning tree CIST port status. Click Monitor > Spanning Tree > CIST
Port to access this screen.
Figure 116 Monitor > Spanning Tree > CIST Port
Each field is described in the following table.
Bridge
Identifier
This is the unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of the bridge priority plus the MAC address.
Designated
Root Bridge
Root bridge refers to the base of the spanning tree.
External Root
Path Cost
The cost of the path from this bridge to the CIST Root Bridge.
Regional Root
Bridge
Root bridge refers to the base of the spanning tree.
Internal Root
Path Cost
The cost of the path from this bridge to the internal Regional Root Bridge.
Designated
Bridge
For each LAN segment, a designated bridge is selected. This bridge has the lowest cost to the root
among the bridges connected to the LAN.
Root Port On each bridge, the bridge communicates with the root through the root port. The root port is the
port on this Switch with the lowest path cost to the root (the root path cost). If there is no root port,
then this Switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network.
Remaining
Hops
This field displays the number of remaining hops.
Last Topology
Change
Topology change information is directly propagated throughout the network from the device that
generates the topology change.
Table 48 Monitor > Spanning Tree > CIST (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 49 Monitor > Spanning Tree > CIST Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This field displays the port number.
Identifier (Priority /
Port Id)
This field displays the identifier (in priority / port number).
External Path Cost
Operation
Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port. It is recommended
to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge. The slower the media, the higher
the cost.
Chapter 14 Monitor: Spanning Tree
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
106
14.2.3 MST Settings
Use this screen to view the Switch’s spanning tree MST instance. Click Monitor > Spanning Tree > MST to
access this screen.
Figure 117 Monitor > Spanning Tree > MST
Each field is described in the following table.
Internal Path Cost
Operation
Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port. It is recommended
to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge. The slower the media, the higher
the cost.
Designated Root
Bridge
Root bridge refers to the base of the spanning tree.
External Root Cost This field displays the external root cost.
Regional Root
Bridge
Root bridge refers to the base of the spanning tree.
Internal Root Cost This field displays the internal root cost.
Designated Bridge For each LAN segment, a designated bridge is selected. This bridge has the lowest cost to the
root among the bridges connected to the LAN.
Edge Port
Operation
An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to forwarding state
immediately without going through listening and learning states right after the port is
configured as an edge port or when its link status changes.
P2P MAC
Operation
This field displays the state of the P2P MAC operation.
Port Role This field displays the state of the port role.
Port State This field displays the state of the port.
Table 49 Monitor > Spanning Tree > CIST Port (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 50 Monitor > Spanning Tree > MST
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MST Instance
MST ID This is the unique identifier for this MST.
Select a number from the drop-down menu to display results.
State This field displays the state.
Regional Root Bridge Root bridge refers to the base of the spanning tree.
Internal Root Cost This field displays the internal root cost.
Designated Bridge For each LAN segment, a designated bridge is selected. This bridge has the lowest cost to
the root among the bridges connected to the LAN.
Chapter 14 Monitor: Spanning Tree
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
107
14.2.4 MST Port
Use this screen to view the Switch’s spanning tree MST port status. Click Monitor > Spanning Tree > MST
Port to access this screen.
Figure 118 Monitor > Spanning Tree > MST Port
Each field is described in the following table.
Root Port On each bridge, the bridge communicates with the root through the root port. The root port
is the port on this Switch with the lowest path cost to the root (the root path cost). If there is
no root port, then this Switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree
network.
Remaining Hops This field displays the number of remaining hops.
Last Topology
Change
Topology change information is directly propagated throughout the network from the
device that generates the topology change.
Table 50 Monitor > Spanning Tree > MST (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 51 Monitor > Spanning Tree > MST Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MST Port
MST ID This is the unique identifier for this MST.
Select a number from the drop-down menu to display results.
Port This field displays the port number.
MSTI ID A VLAN can be mapped to a specific Multiple Spanning Tree Instance (MSTI). MSTI allows
multiple VLANs to use the same spanning tree.
Identifier (Priority /
Port Id)
This field displays the identifier (in priority / port number).
Internal Path
Cost(Operation)
Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port. It is
recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge. The slower the
media, the higher the cost.
Chapter 14 Monitor: Spanning Tree
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
108
14.2.5 STP Statistics
(R)STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches, bridges or
routers. It allows a Switch to interact with other (R)STP-compliant switches in your network to ensure that
only one path exists between any two stations on the network.
The Switch uses IEEE 802.1w RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol) that allows faster convergence of the
spanning tree than STP (while also being backwards compatible with STP-only aware bridges). In RSTP,
topology change information is directly propagated throughout the network from the device that
generates the topology change. In STP, a longer delay is required as the device that causes a topology
change first notifies the root bridge and then the root bridge notifies the network. Both RSTP and STP flush
unwanted learned addresses from the filtering database. In RSTP, the port states are Discarding,
Learning, and Forwarding.
Note: In this user’s guide, “STP” refers to both STP and RSTP.
Use this screen to view the Switch’s spanning tree STP statistics. Click Monitor > Spanning Tree > STP
Statistics to access this screen.
Figure 119 Monitor > Spanning Tree > STP Statistics
Regional Root Bridge Root bridge refers to the base of the spanning tree.
Internal Root Cost This field displays the internal root cost.
Designated Bridge For each LAN segment, a designated bridge is selected. This bridge has the lowest cost to
the root among the bridges connected to the LAN.
Port Role This field displays the state of the port role.
Port State This field displays the state of the port.
Table 51 Monitor > Spanning Tree > MST Port (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 14 Monitor: Spanning Tree
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
109
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 52 Monitor > Spanning Tree > STP Statistics
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MST Port
Port This field displays the port number.
Configuration BDPUs
Received
This field displays the configuration BDPUs received.
TCN BDPUs Received This field displays the TCN BDPUs received.
MSTP BDPUs
Received
This field displays the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) BDPUs received.
Configuration BDPUs
Transmitted
This field displays the configuration BDPUs transmitted.
TCN BDPUs
Transmitted
This field displays the TCN BDPUs transmitted.
MSTP BDPUs
Transmitted
This field displays the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) BDPUs transmitted.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
110
CHAPTER 15
Monitor: LLDP
15.1 Overview
This section provides information for LLDP in Monitor.
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), defined as IEEE 802.1ab, enables LAN devices that support LLDP to
exchange their configured settings. This helps eliminate configuration mismatch issues.
15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The LLDP screen (Section 15.2 on page 110) displays statistics, remote information, and overloading.
15.2 LLDP Settings
This link takes you to a screen where you can view LLDP on the Switch. LLDP allows a network device to
advertise its identity and capabilities on the local network. It also allows the device to maintain and
store information from adjacent devices which are directly connected to the network device.
15.2.1 Statistics Settings
Use this screen to view the Switch’s LLDP global and port statistics. Click Monitor > LLDP > Statistics to
access this screen.
Chapter 15 Monitor: LLDP
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
111
Figure 120 Monitor > LLDP > Statistics
Each field is described in the following table.
15.2.2 Remote Information
Use this screen to view the Switch’s LLDP remote device information. Click Monitor > LLDP > Remote
Information to access this screen.
Table 53 Monitor > LLDP > Statistics
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Statistics
Insertions This field displays the number of insertions.
Deletions This field displays the number of deletions.
Drops This field displays the number of drops.
Age Outs This field displays the number of age outs.
Clear Click Clear to clear statistics.
Refresh Click Refresh to reload the page.
LLDP Port Statistics
Port This field displays the port number.
TX Frames Total This field displays the total number of TX LLDP frames.
RX Frames Total This field displays the total number of RX LLDP frames.
RX Frames
Discarded This field displays the number of discarded RX LLDP frames.
RX Frames Errors This field displays the number of RX LLDP frames errors.
RX TLVs
Discarded This field displays the number of discarded RX LLDP TLVs.
RX TLVs
Unrecognized This field displays the number of unrecognized RX LLDP TLVs.
RX Ageouts Total This field displays the total number of RX LLDP ageouts.
Chapter 15 Monitor: LLDP
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
112
Figure 121 Monitor > LLDP > Remote Information
Each field is described in the following table.
15.2.3 Overloading
Use this screen to view the Switch’s LLDP port overloading. Click Monitor > LLDP > Overloading to access
this screen.
Figure 122 Monitor > LLDP > Overloading
Table 54 Monitor > LLDP > Remote Information
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Remote Device
Local Port This field displays the local port.
Chassis ID Subtype This field displays the chassis ID subtype.
Chassis ID This field displays the chassis ID.
Port ID Subtype This field displays the port ID subtype.
Port ID This field displays the port ID.
System Name This field displays the descriptive name of the Switch for identification purposes.
Time to Live This field displays the live time of this entry.
Action
Detail Click Detail to show more information about this entry.
Delete Click Delete to remove the entry.
Chapter 15 Monitor: LLDP
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
113
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 55 Monitor > LLDP > Overloading
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Overloading
Port This label shows the port you are viewing.
Total (Bytes) This field displays the total in bytes.
Left to Send (Bytes) This field displays what is left to send in bytes.
Status This field displays whether the Switch is overloading or not.
Bytes Detail This field displays how many bytes used by TLVs
Mandatory TLVs This field displays how many bytes used by mandatory TLVs.
MED Capabilities This field displays how many bytes used by MED capabilities.
MED Location This field displays how many bytes used by MED location.
MED Network
Policy This field displays how many bytes used by MED network policy.
MED Extended
Power via MDI This field displays how many bytes used by MED extended power through MDI.
802.3 TLVs This field displays how many bytes used by 802.3 TLVs.
Optional TLVs This field displays how many bytes used by optional TLVs.
MED Inventory This field displays how many bytes used by MED inventory.
802.1 TLVs This field displays how many bytes used by 802.1 TLVs.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
114
CHAPTER 16
Monitor: Security
16.1 Overview
This section provides information for Security in Monitor.
This link takes you to a screen where you can view the settings or traffic statistics which contain detailed
information about specific activities.
16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The Port Security screen (Section 16.2 on page 114) displays global and port.
•The 802.1X screen (Section 16.3 on page 115) displays port and authenticated hosts.
16.2 Port Security
Port security allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and/or configured static
MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch. The Switch can learn up to 8K MAC addresses in
total with no limit on individual ports; system total MAC address entry is 8K. Static MAC address still can
be configured when port security is enabled; the function of port security is concerned with dynamic
MAC address learn action. When total MAC address entry is 8k, static MAC can not be configured.
Use this screen to view Switch port security settings. Click Monitor > Security > Port Security to access this
screen.
Chapter 16 Monitor: Security
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
115
Figure 123 Monitor > Security > Port Security
Each field is described in the following table.
16.3 802.1X Security Settings
Use this screen to view Switch 802.1x security settings.
16.3.1 Port Settings
Use this screen to view the Switch’s 802.1x port status. Click Monitor > Security > 802.1X > Port to access
this screen.
Table 56 Monitor > Security > Port Security
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Security
Status This field displays the status of global control information.
Port
Port This field displays a port number.
Status This field displays the status of port based control information.
Max MAC Entry
Number Displays the designated maximum number of allowed MAC entries. The maximum MAC
entry number can be learned for individual ports.
Current Addr
Number This field displays the number of the current addr.
Action This field displays the actions the Switch takes on the associated classified traffic flow.
Chapter 16 Monitor: Security
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
116
Figure 124 Monitor > Security > 802.1X > Port
Each field is described in the following table.
16.3.2 Authenticated Hosts
Use this screen to view the Switch’s 802.1x security authenticated host status. Click Monitor > Security >
802.1X > Authenticated Hosts to access this screen.
Figure 125 Monitor > Security > 802.1X > Authenticated Hosts
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 57 Monitor > Security > 802.1X > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Status
Port This label shows the port you are viewing.
Status This field displays status of the port.
Table 58 Monitor > Security > 802.1X > Authenticated Hosts
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Authenticated Hosts
User Name This field displays the name of a user.
Port This label shows the port you are viewing.
Session Time This label shows the session time.
Authentication
Method
This label shows the authentication method.
MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
117
CHAPTER 17
Monitor: Management
17.1 Overview
This section provides information for Management in Monitor.
This chapter describes how to view management settings on the Switch.
17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The Syslog screen (Section 17.2 on page 117) displays logging filter select and shows system log.
•The Error Disable screen (Section 17.3 on page 118) displays global and port.
17.2 Syslog
Use this screen to view Switch syslog management. Click Monitor > Management > Syslog to access this
screen.
Figure 126 Monitor > Management > Syslog
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 59 Monitor > Management > Syslog
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Logging Filter Select
Target Select Buffered or Flash.
Buffered: Login saved to temporary memory.
Flash: Login saved to permanent memory.
Chapter 17 Monitor: Management
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
118
17.3 Error Disable
This link takes you to a screen where you can view CPU protection and error disable recovery.
Use this screen to view Switch global and port error disable management. Click Monitor > Management
> Error Disable to access this screen.
Severity This field displays two options: Available and Acting.
Severity type: crit, emerg, alert, error, warning, notice, info, and debug.
Available Click < to move a severity type from the acting box to the available box.
Click > to move a severity type to the acting box from the available box.
Acting Click < to move a severity type from the acting box to the available box.
Click > to move a severity type to the acting box from the available box.
>Click > to move a severity type to the acting box from the available box.
<Click < to move a severity type from the acting box to the available box.
View Click View to display results.
Clear Click Clear to clear results.
Show System Log The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network
to syslog servers that collect the event messages. A syslog-enabled device can generate a
syslog message and send it to a syslog server
No. This field displays the number you are viewing.
Timestamp This field displays the timestamp.
Category This field displays the category.
Severity This field displays the severity.
Message The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network
to syslog servers that collect the event messages. A syslog-enabled device can generate a
syslog message and send it to a syslog server.
Table 59 Monitor > Management > Syslog (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 17 Monitor: Management
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
119
Figure 127 Monitor > Management > Error Disable
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 60 Monitor > Management > Error Disable
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Error Disable
Recovery Interval View the number of seconds (from 30 to 2592000) for the time interval of the recovery.
Reason Status
Error Disabled
Reason This field displays the supported features that allow the Switch to shut down a port or
discard packets on a port according to the feature requirements and what action you
configure.
Timer Status Select this option to allow the Switch to wait for the specified time interval to activate a port
or allow specific packets on a port, after the error was gone. De-select this option to turn off
this rule.
Port Status
Port This field displays the port number.
Error Disabled
Reason This field displays the supported features that allow the Switch to shut down a port or
discard packets on a port according to the feature requirements and what action you
configure.
Time Left (sec) This field displays the time left in seconds.
Action This field displays the action.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
120
CHAPTER 18
Configuration: System
18.1 Overview
This section provides information for System in Configuration.
18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The IP screen (Section 18.2 on page 120) displays IPv4 and IPv6 settings.
• The Time screen (Section 18.3 on page 122) displays the system time and SNTP settings.
• The Information screen (Section 18.4 on page 123) displays the system information.
18.2 IP Settings
The Switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network. The factory default IP address is
192.168.1.1. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. The factory default
subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
18.2.1 IPv4 Settings
Use this screen to view the IPv4 interface status and Switch’s management IPv4 addresses. Click
Configuration > System > IP > IPv4 to open this screen.
Figure 128 Configuration > System > IP > IPv4
Chapter 18 Configuration: System
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
121
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
18.2.2 IPv6 Settings
Use this screen to view the IPv6 interface status and Switch’s management IPv6 addresses.
Click Configuration > System > IP > IPv6 to open this screen.
Figure 129 Configuration > System > IP > IPv6
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 61 Configuration > System > IP > IPv4
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv4 Address
Mode Select Static to define the IPv4 network properties or DHCP to allow the device to define the
properties.
IP Address Enter the IP address of the Switch in the IP domain.
Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of the Switch in the IP domain.
Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation, for example
192.168.1.254.
DNS 1 Enter the IP address for the primary domain name server. DNS (Domain Name System) is for
mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa.
DNS 2 Enter the IP address for the secondary domain name server. DNS (Domain Name System) is for
mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa.
Management
VLAN
Enter the port number of the management VLAN.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 62 Configuration > System > IP > IPv6
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv6 Address
DHCPv6 Client Select Enable to allow the device to act as a DHCPv6 client or Disable to disallow it. This field
displays the Switch’s DHCP settings when it is acting as a DHCPv6 client.
Auto
Configuration
Select Enable to allow the device to auto-configure the IPv6 properties or Disable to manually
enter the properties.
IPv6 Address Enter the IPv6 address of the Switch in the IP domain.
Gateway Enter the IPv6 address of the default outgoing gateway.
Chapter 18 Configuration: System
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
122
18.3 Time
The Time option is used to setup the system time and SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) server settings.
18.3.1 System Time Settings
In the navigation panel, click Configuration > System > Time > System Time to display the screen as
shown.
Figure 130 Configuration > System > Time > System Time
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 62 Configuration > System > IP > IPv6 (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 63 Configuration > System > Time > System Time
LABEL DESCRIPTION
System Time
Enable SNTP Select Enable to enable using a simple network time protocol (SNTP) server to manage the
system time or Disable to manually manage system time.
Manual Time Select the system date and time values from the dropdown lists.
Time Zone Select the time zone from the dropdown list.
Daylight Saving
Time
Select Enable to use Daylight Saving Time to offset the system time or Disable to not adjust
system time.
Daylight Saving
Time Offset
Enter the daylight saving time offset value in minutes.
Start Date Select the start date of the daylight saving time period from the dropdown lists.
End Date Select the end date of the daylight saving time period from the dropdown lists.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 18 Configuration: System
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
123
18.3.2 SNTP Server Settings
In the navigation panel, click Configuration > System > Time > SNTP Server to display the screen as
shown.
Figure 131 Configuration > System > Time > SNTP Server
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
18.4 Information
The information option is used to set the following system information properties: system name, system
location, and system contact information.
18.4.1 System Information Settings
In the navigation panel, click Configuration > System > Information > System Information to display the
screen as shown. You can set the system name, system location, and system contact.
Figure 132 Configuration > System > Information > System Information
Table 64 Configuration > System > Time > SNTP Server
LABEL DESCRIPTION
SNTP Server
Server Enter the address of the simple network time protocol (SNTP) server as an IP address
(192.168.0.1) or as a URL (www.zyxel.com).
Server Port Enter the port number of the SNTP server. The numeric value can be between 1 and 65535.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 18 Configuration: System
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
124
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 65 Configuration > System > Information > System Information
LABEL DESCRIPTION
System Information
System Name Enter the descriptive name of the Switch for identification purposes.
System Location Enter the geographic location of the Switch for identification purposes.
System Contact Enter the person in charge of the Switch for identification purposes.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
125
CHAPTER 19
Configuration: Port
19.1 Overview
This section provides information for Port in Configuration.
19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The Port screen (Section 19.2 on page 125) displays general port settings.
• The EEE screen (Section 19.3 on page 127) displays the port EEE settings.
• The PoE screen (Section 19.4 on page 129) displays the port PoE settings.
• The Bandwidth Management screen (Section 19.5 on page 134) displays the port ingress and egress
settings.
• The Storm Control screen (Section 19.6 on page 135) displays the port storm control settings.
19.2 Port Settings
Use this screen to view and edit general port settings.
19.2.1 Port
Use this screen to view Switch port settings and select ports for configuration. Click Configuration > Port >
Port to open this screen.
Chapter 19 Configuration: Port
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
126
Figure 133 Configuration > Port > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
19.2.2 Port Edit
Use this screen to configure Switch port settings. Click Configuration > Port > Port > Edit to open this
screen.
Table 66 Configuration > Port > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Port Displays the port index number.
Port Name Displays a descriptive name that identifies this port. The length of the name can be up to 32
alpha-numerical characters.
Note: Due to space limitations, the port name may be truncated in some Web Configurator
screens.
State Displays the port status as enabled or disabled.
Link Status Displays the link status as up or down.
Speed Displays the speed of the Ethernet connection on this port. The choices are Auto, 10M, 100M,
and 1000M.
Duplex Displays the duplex mode of the Ethernet connection on this port. The choices are auto, full, or
half.
FlowCtrl State Displays the flow control state as enabled or disabled. A concentration of traffic on a port
decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory causing packet discards and frame
losses. Flow Control is used to regulate transmission of signals to match the bandwidth of the
receiving port.
Edit Select this check box to configure the properties of a port. Click the Edit button change the
properties of the port.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 19 Configuration: Port
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
127
Figure 134 Configuration > Port > Port > Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
19.3 EEE Settings
Use this screen to view and edit the port EEE settings.
19.3.1 EEE
Use this screen to view Switch port Energy-Efficient Ethernet (EEE) settings and select ports for
configuration. Click Configuration > Port > EEE > EEE to open this screen.
Table 67 Configuration > Port > Port > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Port List Displays the list of port index numbers that are being configured.
Port Name Enter a descriptive name that identifies this port. The length of the name can be up to 32 alpha-
numerical characters.
Note: Due to space limitations, the port name may be truncated in some Web Configurator
screens.
State Select Enable to enable the ports or Disable to disable them.
Speed Select the speed of the Ethernet connection on this port. The choices are Auto, 10M, 100M, and
1000M.
Duplex Select the duplex mode of the Ethernet connection on this port. The choices are Auto, Full, or
Half.
FlowCtrl State Select Enable to allow the device to manage data flow or Disable to have no data flow
management. A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows
buffer memory causing packet discards and frame losses. Flow Control is used to regulate
transmission of signals to match the bandwidth of the receiving port.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 19 Configuration: Port
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
128
Figure 135 Configuration > Port > EEE > EEE
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
19.3.2 EEE Edit
Use this screen to configure Switch port EEE settings. Click Configuration > Port > EEE > EEE > Edit to open
this screen.
Figure 136 Configuration > Port > EEE > EEE > Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 68 Configuration > Port > EEE > EEE
LABEL DESCRIPTION
EEE
Port Displays the port index number.
State Displays the port status as enabled or disabled.
Edit Select this check box to configure the properties of a port. Click the Edit button change the
properties of the port.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 69 Configuration > Port > EEE > EEE > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
EEE
Port List Displays the list of port index numbers that are being configured.
State Select Enable to designate the ports as EEE or Disable to not designate them as EEE.
Chapter 19 Configuration: Port
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
129
19.4 PoE Settings
The Switch supports both the IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet (PoE) and IEEE 802.3at High Power over
Ethernet (PoE) standards. The Switch is Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE) because it provides a source of
power through its Ethernet ports, and each device that receives power through an Ethernet port is a
Powered Device (PD).
19.4.1 Global Settings
In the navigation panel, click Configuration > Port > PoE > Global to display the screen as shown. Use this
screen to configure Power over Ethernet (PoE) global settings.
Figure 137 Configuration > Port > PoE > Global
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
19.4.2 Port Settings
Use this screen to view Switch port PoE settings and select ports for configuration. Click Configuration >
Port > PoE > Port to open this screen.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 69 Configuration > Port > EEE > EEE > Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 70 Configuration > Port > PoE > Global
LABEL DESCRIPTION
PoE Mode Select the power management mode you want the Switch to use.
•Classification – Select this if you want the Switch to reserve the maximum power for each PD
according to the PD’s power class and priority level. If the total power supply runs out, PDs
with lower priority do not get power to function. In this mode, the maximum power is
reserved based on what you configure in Max Power or the standard power limit for each
class.
•Consumption – Select this if you want the Switch to supply the actual power that the PD
needs. The Switch also allocates power based on a port’s Max Power and the PD’s power
class and priority level. The Switch puts a limit on the maximum amount of power the PD can
request and use. In this mode, the default maximum power that can be delivered to the PD
is 33 W (IEEE 802.3at Class 4) or 22 W (IEEE 802.3af Classes 0 to 3).
Pre-Allocate This field is only available on GS1900-8HP (Revision B1) and GS1900-10HP only.
Select Enable to have the Switch pre-allocate power to each port based on the classification of
the PD device. Otherwise, select Disable.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 19 Configuration: Port
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
130
Figure 138 Configuration > Port > PoE > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 71 Configuration > Port > PoE > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Edit Select one or more ports in the first column of the table and click this to configure PoE settings
for the ports.
Port Displays the port index number.
State Displays which ports can receive power from the Switch. You can set this in the Configuration >
Port > PoE Edit screen.
•Disable – The powered device (PD) connected to this port cannot get power.
•Enable – The PD connected to this port can receive power.
Class This shows the power classification of the PD. Each PD has a specified maximum power that fall
under one of the classes.
The Class is a number from 0 to 4, where each value represents the range of power that the
Switch provides to the PD. The power ranges for each class are as follows.
•Class 0 – Default, 0.44 to 12.94
•Class 1 – Optional, 0.44 to 3.84
•Class 2 – Optional, 3.84 to 6.49
•Class 3 – Optional, 6.49 to 12.95
•Class 4 – Reserved (PSEs classify as Class 0) in a switch that supports IEEE 802.3af only.
Optional, 12.95 to 25.50 in a switch that supports IEEE 802.3at.
PD Priority When the total power requested by the PDs exceeds the total PoE power budget on the Switch,
you can set the PD priority to allow the Switch to provide power to ports with higher priority first.
•Critical has the highest priority.
•High has the Switch assign power to the port after all critical priority ports are served.
•Medium has the Switch assign power to the port after all critical and high priority ports are
served.
•Low has the Switch assign power to the port after all critical, high and medium priority ports
are served.
Chapter 19 Configuration: Port
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
131
19.4.3 PoE Edit
Use this screen to configure Switch port PoE settings. Select a port and click Edit in the Configuration >
Port > PoE > Port screen to open this screen.
Power-Up This shows how the Switch provides power to the connected PD at power-up.
802.3af – the Switch follows the IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet standard to supply power to
the connected PDs during power-up.
Legacy – the Switch can provide power to the connected PDs that require high inrush currents
at power-up.
Pre-802.3at – the Switch initially offers power on the port according to the IEEE 802.3af standard,
and then switches to support the IEEE 802.3at standard within 75 milliseconds after a PD is
connected to the port. Select this option if the Switch is performing 2-event Layer-1 classification
(PoE+ hardware classification) or the connected PD is NOT performing Layer 2 power
classification using Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP).
802.3at – the Switch supports the IEEE 802.3at High Power over Ethernet standard and can
supply power of up to 30W per Ethernet port. IEEE 802.3at is also known as PoE+ or PoE Plus. An
IEEE 802.3at compatible device is referred to as Type 2. Power Class 4 (High Power) can only be
used by Type 2 devices. If the connected PD requires a Class 4 current when it is turned on, it will
be powered up in this mode.
Wide Range
Detection
This field is available on GS1900-8HP (Revision B1) and GS1900-10HP only.
This shows whether the Switch enables a wider detection range for the PD or not.
The Switch detects whether a connected device is a powered device or not before supplying
power to the port. For the PD detection, the Switch applies a fixed voltage to the device and
then receives returned current. If the returned current is within the IEEE 802.3AF/AT standard
range, the device will be considered as a valid PD by the Switch.
However, in real cases, environmental interferences might easily cause the returned current out
of the standard range. This field displays Enable if the Switch applies a wider range for PD
detection. Otherwise, it displays Disable.
Consuming
Power (mW)
This field displays the current amount of power consumed by the PD from the Switch on this port.
Max Power (mW) This field displays the maximum amount of power the PD could use from the Switch on this port.
Time Range
Name This field displays the name of the time range (schedule) rule which is applied to the port. PoE is
enabled at the specified time or date.
Status This field displays whether the port can receive power from the Switch (In) or not (Out) currently.
It shows – if there is no schedule applied to the port.
Table 71 Configuration > Port > PoE > Port (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 19 Configuration: Port
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
132
Figure 139 Configuration > Port > PoE > Port > Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 72 Configuration > Port > PoE > Port > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
PoE Port
Port List Displays the list of port index numbers that are being configured.
PD State Select Enable to provide power to a PD connected to the port or Disable so the port cannot
receive power from the Switch.
PD Priority This field is not available for the SFP or SFP+ ports.
When the total power requested by the PDs exceeds the total PoE power budget on the Switch,
you can set the PD priority to allow the Switch to provide power to ports with higher priority.
Select Critical to give the PD connected to this port the highest priority.
Select High to set the Switch to assign the remaining power to the port after all critical priority
ports are served.
Select Medium to set the Switch to assign the remaining power to the port after all critical and
high priority ports are served.
Select Low to set the Switch to assign the remaining power to the port after all critical, high and
medium priority ports are served.
Power-Up Set how the Switch provides power to a connected PD at power-up.
802.3af – the Switch follows the IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet standard to supply power to
the connected PDs during power-up.
Legacy – the Switch can provide power to the connected PDs that require high inrush currents
at power-up.
Pre-802.3at – the Switch initially offers power on the port according to the IEEE 802.3af standard,
and then switches to support the IEEE 802.3at standard within 75 milliseconds after a PD is
connected to the port. Select this option if the Switch is performing 2-event Layer-1 classification
(PoE+ hardware classification) or the connected PD is NOT performing Layer 2 power
classification using Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP).
802.3at – the Switch supports the IEEE 802.3at High Power over Ethernet standard and can
supply power of up to 30W per Ethernet port. IEEE 802.3at is also known as PoE+ or PoE Plus. An
IEEE 802.3at compatible device is referred to as Type 2. Power Class 4 (High Power) can only be
used by Type 2 devices. If the connected PD requires a Class 4 current when it is turned on, it will
be powered up in this mode.
Chapter 19 Configuration: Port
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
133
Wide Range
Detection
This field is available on the GS1900-8HP (Revision B1) and GS1900-10HP only.
Select whether to enable a wider detection range for the PD or not.
The Switch detects whether a connected device is a powered device or not before supplying
power to the port. For the PD detection, the Switch applies a fixed voltage to the device and
then receives returned current. If the returned current is within the IEEE 802.3AF/AT standard
range, the device will be considered as a valid PD by the Switch.
However, in real cases, environmental interferences might easily cause the returned current out
of the standard range. This field displays Enable if the Switch applies a wider range for PD
detection. Otherwise, it displays Disable.
Max Power Type Select Classification-based to have the Switch automatically decide the maximum amount of
power it can provide on the port according to the connected PD’s power classification.
Select User-defined to manually specify the maximum amount of power the PD could use from
the Switch on this port.
Max Power
Threshold
Specify the maximum amount of power the Switch can provide on the port if you set Max
Power Type to User-defined.
Enter a value between 1000 and 33000 in increments of 200.
Time Range Select a pre-defined schedule (created using the Time Range screen) to control when the
Switch enables PoE to provide power on the port.
If you leave this field blank, there is no schedule applied to the port.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 72 Configuration > Port > PoE > Port > Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 19 Configuration: Port
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
134
19.5 Bandwidth Management
Bandwidth management means defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and/or out-
going traffic flows on a port.
19.5.1 Bandwidth Control
Use this screen to view Egress Bandwidth Management settings and select ports for configuration. Click
Configuration > Port > Bandwidth Management > Egress Global Burst to open this screen.
Figure 140 Configuration > Port > Bandwidth Management > Egress Global Burst
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 73 Configuration > Port > Bandwidth Management > Egress Global Burst
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Egress Global Burst
Egress Global
Burst
Specify the current egress burst size in bytes for all ports.
Port Rate
Port Displays the port index number.
Ingress Rate Limit
(Kbps)
Displays the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second (Kbps) for the incoming traffic
flow on a port.
Egress Rate Limit
(Kbps)
Displays the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second (Kbps) for the outgoing traffic
flow on a port.
Chapter 19 Configuration: Port
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
135
19.5.2 Port Rate Edit
Use this screen to configure port rate Bandwidth Management settings. Click Configuration > Port >
Bandwidth Management > Egress Global Burst > Edit to open this screen.
Figure 141 Configuration > Port > Bandwidth Management > Egress Global Burst > Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
19.6 Storm Control
Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast, multicast and destination lookup failure (DLF)
packets the Switch receives per second on the ports. When the maximum number of allowable
broadcast, multicast and/or DLF packets is reached per second, the subsequent packets are
discarded. Enable this feature to reduce broadcast, multicast and/or DLF packets in your network. You
can specify limits for each packet type on each port.
Edit Select this check box to configure the properties of a port. Click the Edit button change the
properties of the port.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 73 Configuration > Port > Bandwidth Management > Egress Global Burst (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 74 Configuration > Port > Bandwidth Management > Egress Global Burst > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Rate
Port List Displays the list of port index numbers that are being configured.
Ingress State Select Enable to activate ingress peak rate limits on the ports.
Ingress
Bandwidth
(Kbps)
Enter the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second (Kbps) for the outgoing traffic flow
on a port.
Egress State Select Enable to activate egress peak rate limits on the ports.
Egress
Bandwidth
(Kbps)
Enter the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second (Kbps) for the outgoing traffic flow
on a port.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 19 Configuration: Port
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
136
19.6.1 Port Settings
Use this screen to view Storm Control settings for individual ports. Click Configuration > Port > Storm
Control > Storm Control to open this screen.
Figure 142 Configuration > Port > Storm Control > Storm Control
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
19.6.2 Port Edit
Use this screen to configure Storm Control settings for individual ports. Click Configuration > Port > Storm
Control > Storm Control > Edit to open this screen.
Table 75 Configuration > Port > Storm Control > Storm Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Storm Control
Port Displays the port index number.
State Displays whether the traffic storm control on the Switch is enabled or disabled.
Broadcast (pps) Displays how many broadcast packets the port receives per second.
Unknown
Multicast (pps)
Displays how many multicast packets the port receives per second.
Unknown Unicast
(pps)
Displays how many unicast packets the port receives per second.
Action Displays the action the device takes when a limit is reached. The following options are
available:
•Drop – drop the packet.
•Shutdown – shutdown the connection.
Edit Select this check box to configure the properties of a port. Click the Edit button change the
properties of the port.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 19 Configuration: Port
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
137
Figure 143 Configuration > Port > Storm Control > Storm Control > Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 76 Configuration > Port > Storm Control > Storm Control > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Storm Control Port
Port List Displays the port list index numbers.
State Select Enable to activate traffic storm control on the ports.
Action Determines the action the device takes when a limit is reached. The following options are
available:
•Drop – drop the packet when limit is reached.
•Shutdown – shutdown the connection when a limit is reached.
Broadcast (pps) Click the Enable checkbox to active the feature.
Enter the maximum number of broadcast packets the port can receive per second.
Unknown
Multicast (pps)
Click the Enable checkbox to active the feature.
Enter the maximum number of multicast packets the port can receive per second.
Unknown Unicast
(pps)
Click the Enable checkbox to active the feature.
Enter the maximum number of unicast packets the port can receive per second.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
138
CHAPTER 20
Configuration: VLAN
20.1 Overview
This section provides information for VLAN in Configuration.
A VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical
networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one
group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same groups;
the traffic must first go through a router.
In MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the
subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network
resources of another on the same LAN, therefore a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another
user on the same network.
VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable
logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets go to each and
every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain.
20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The VLAN screen (Section 20.2 on page 139) displays VLAN, port, and VLAN port settings.
• The Guest VLAN screen (Section 20.3 on page 143) displays the global and port settings of the Switch.
• The Voice VLAN screen (Section 20.4 on page 145) displays the global, OUI, and port settings of the
Switch.
Chapter 20 Configuration: VLAN
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
139
20.2 VLAN Settings
Use this screen to view and configure VLAN settings.
20.2.1 VLAN
Use this screen to view VLAN settings. Click Configuration > VLAN > VLAN > VLAN to open this screen.
Figure 144 Configuration > VLAN > VLAN > VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
20.2.2 VLAN Add
Use this screen to add a VLAN. Click Configuration > VLAN > VLAN > VLAN > Add to open this screen.
Figure 145 Configuration > VLAN > VLAN > VLAN > Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 77 Configuration > VLAN > VLAN > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN
VLAN ID Displays the VLAN ID number.
VLAN Name Displays a descriptive name for the VLAN group for identification purposes. This name consists of
up to 64 printable characters; spaces are allowed.
VLAN Type Displays Default or Static.
Action
Edit Click Edit to make changes to the entry.
Add Click Add to create a new VLAN entry.
Table 78 Configuration > VLAN > VLAN > VLAN > Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN
VLAN List Enter the VLAN ID numbers.
Use a dash to associate consecutive VLANs and a comma (no spaces) to associate non-
consecutive VLANs. For example, 51–53 includes 51, 52 and 53, but 51,53 does not include 52.
Chapter 20 Configuration: VLAN
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
140
20.2.3 Port Settings
Use this screen to view port settings and select VLANs for configuration. Click Configuration > VLAN >
VLAN > Port to open this screen.
Figure 146 Configuration > VLAN > VLAN > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
VLAN Name
Prefix
Enter a prefix for the VLAN name.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 78 Configuration > VLAN > VLAN > VLAN > Add (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 79 Configuration > VLAN > VLAN > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Port Displays the port index number.
PVID A PVID (Port VLAN ID) is a tag that adds to incoming untagged frames received on a port so
that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines.
Accept Frame
Type
Specify the type of frames allowed on a port. Choices are All, Tag Only and Untag Only.
Ingress Check If this check box is selected for a port, the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do
not include this port in its member set.
VLAN Trunk Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers (but not ports directly
connected to end users) to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through
the Switch.
Chapter 20 Configuration: VLAN
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
141
20.2.4 Port Edit
Use this screen to configure port settings. Click Configuration > VLAN > VLAN > Port > Edit to open this
screen.
Figure 147 Configuration > VLAN > VLAN > Port > Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
20.2.5 VLAN Port
Port-based VLANs are VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC
address and its associated port. Port-based VLANs require allowed outgoing ports to be defined for
each port. Therefore, if you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other, for example,
Edit Select this check box to configure the properties of a port. Click the Edit button change the
properties of the port.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 79 Configuration > VLAN > VLAN > Port (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 80 Configuration > VLAN > VLAN > Port > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Port Select Displays the list of port index numbers that are being configured.
PVID Enter a number between 1 and 4094 as the port VLAN ID.
Accepted Type Select All from the drop-down list box to accept all untagged or tagged frames on this port. This
is the default setting.
Select Tag Only to accept only tagged frames on this port. All untagged frames will be
dropped.
Select Untag Only to accept only untagged frames on this port. All tagged frames will be
dropped.
Ingress Filtering If this check box is selected for a port, the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do
not include this port in its member set.
Clear this check box to disable ingress filtering.
VLAN Trunk Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers (but not ports directly
connected to end users) to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through
the Switch.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 20 Configuration: VLAN
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
142
between conference rooms in a hotel, you must define the egress (an egress port is an outgoing port,
that is, a port through which a data packet leaves) for both ports. Port-based VLANs are specific only to
the Switch on which they were created.
Use this screen to view VLAN port settings. Click Configuration > VLAN > VLAN > VLAN Port to open this
screen.
Figure 148 Configuration > VLAN > VLAN > VLAN Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 81 Configuration > VLAN > VLAN > VLAN Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Port
VLAN ID Select the ID of the VLAN you want to configure.
Port Displays the port index value.
Membership Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group.
Select Excluded to remove the port from the VLAN.
Select Tagged to set the port TX tag status to tagged in the VLAN.
Select Untagged to set the port TX tag status to untagged in the VLAN.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 20 Configuration: VLAN
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
143
20.3 Guest VLAN
When 802.1x port authentication is enabled on the Switch and its ports, clients that do not have the
correct credentials are blocked from using the ports. You can configure your Switch to have one VLAN
that acts as a guest VLAN. If you enable the guest VLAN (102 in the example) on a port (2 in the
example), the user (A in the example) that is not IEEE 802.1x capable or fails to enter the correct user
name and password can still access the port, but traffic from the user is forwarded to the guest VLAN.
That is, unauthenticated users can have access to limited network resources in the same guest VLAN,
such as the Internet. The rights granted to the Guest VLAN depends on how the network administrator
configures switches or routers with the guest network feature.
Figure 149 Guest VLAN Example
Use this screen to view and configure guest VLAN settings.
20.3.1 Global Settings
Use this screen to configure the global Guest VLAN settings. Click Configuration > VLAN > Guest VLAN >
Global to open this screen.
Figure 150 Configuration > VLAN > Guest VLAN > Global
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 82 Configuration > VLAN > Guest VLAN > Global
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Global
State Select to enable the global Guest VLAN feature.
Guest VLAN ID Enter the global guest VLAN ID.
Chapter 20 Configuration: VLAN
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
144
20.3.2 Port Settings
Use this screen to view the Guest VLAN port settings and select VLAN ports for configuration. Click
Configuration > VLAN > Guest VLAN > Port to open this screen.
Figure 151 Configuration > VLAN > Guest VLAN > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
20.3.3 Port Edit
Use this screen to configure the guest VLAN port EEE settings. Click Configuration > VLAN > Guest VLAN >
Port > Edit to open this screen.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 82 Configuration > VLAN > Guest VLAN > Global (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 83 Configuration > VLAN > Guest VLAN > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Port Displays the port index number.
State Display the state of the selected port.
Edit Select this check box to configure the properties of a port. Click the Edit button change the
properties of the port.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 20 Configuration: VLAN
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
145
Figure 152 Configuration > VLAN > Guest VLAN > Port > Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
20.4 Voice VLAN
The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN, then the switch can
classify and schedule network traffic. It is recommended that there be two VLANs on a port – one for
voice, one for data.
Use this screen to view and configure voice VLAN settings.
20.4.1 Global Settings
Use this screen to configure the global Voice VLAN settings. Click Configuration > VLAN > Voice VLAN >
Global to open this screen.
Figure 153 Configuration > VLAN > Voice VLAN > Global
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 84 Configuration > VLAN > Guest VLAN > Port > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Port List Displays the list of port index numbers that are being configured.
State Enable/Disable the guest VLAN feature.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 85 Configuration > VLAN > Voice VLAN > Global
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Global
State Select Enable to activate the global voice VLAN feature.
Chapter 20 Configuration: VLAN
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
146
20.4.2 OUI Settings
Use this screen to view the OUI settings. The maximum number of entries is 16. Modifying the OUI table
will restart auto detection of OUI process. Click Configuration > VLAN > Voice VLAN > OUI to open this
screen.
Figure 154 Configuration > VLAN > Voice VLAN > OUI
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Voice VLAN ID Enter the global voice VLAN ID. It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot equal
each port PVID. It is a conflict in configuration if the value equals management VID, MVR VID,
PVID, and so on. The allowed range is 1 to 4094.
Cos/802.1p Displays the 802.1p packet priority field.
Remark Cos/
802.1p
Select to Enable the priority remark function for cos/802.1p.
Aging Time Enter the voice VLAN secure learning aging time. The allowed range is 10 to 10000000 seconds.
It is used when security mode or auto detect mode is enabled. In other cases, it will be based
on hardware aging time. The actual aging time will be situated between the [age_time; 2 *
age_time] interval.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 85 Configuration > VLAN > Voice VLAN > Global (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 86 Configuration > VLAN > Voice VLAN > OUI
LABEL DESCRIPTION
OUI
OUI Address Displays an OUI address. A telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a
vendor by IEEE. It must be 6 characters long and the input format is "xx-xx-xx" (x is a hexadecimal
digit).
Description Displays a description of the OUI address. Normally, it describes which vendor telephony device
it belongs to. The allowed string length is 0 to 32.
Action
Edit Click Edit to make changes to the entry.
Delete Click Delete to remove the entry.
Add Click Add to create a new OUI entry.
Chapter 20 Configuration: VLAN
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
147
20.4.3 OUI Add or Edit
Use this screen to add or edit an OUI address. Click Configuration > VLAN > Voice VLAN > OUI > Add or
Edit to open this screen.
Figure 155 Configuration > VLAN > Voice VLAN > OUI > Add or Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
20.4.4 Port Settings
Use this screen to view the Voice VLAN port settings and select a port for configuration. Click
Configuration > VLAN > Voice VLAN > Port to open this screen.
Figure 156 Configuration > VLAN > Voice VLAN > Port
Table 87 Configuration > VLAN > Voice VLAN > OUI > Add or Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add/Edit OUI
OUI Address Enter an OUI address. A telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a
vendor by IEEE. It must be 6 characters long and the input format is "xx-xx-xx" (x is a hexadecimal
digit).
Description Enter a description of the OUI address. Normally, it describes which vendor telephony device it
belongs to. The allowed string length is 0 to 32.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 20 Configuration: VLAN
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
148
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
20.4.5 Port Edit
Use this screen to edit the ports security state. Click Configuration > VLAN > Voice VLAN > Port > Edit to
open this screen.
Figure 157 Configuration > VLAN > Voice VLAN > Port > Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 88 Configuration > VLAN > Voice VLAN > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Port Displays the port index value.
State Displays the Voice VLAN port security mode state. When the function is enabled, all non-
telephonic MAC addresses in the Voice VLAN will be blocked for 10 seconds. Possible port
modes are:
•Enabled: Enable Voice VLAN security mode operation.
•Disabled: Disable Voice VLAN security mode operation.
Edit Select this check box to configure the properties of a port. Click the Edit button change the
properties of the port.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 89 Configuration > VLAN > Voice VLAN > Port > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Port Displays the ports index value.
State Select the Voice VLAN port security mode state. When the function is enabled, all non-
telephonic MAC addresses in the Voice VLAN will be blocked for 10 seconds. Possible port
modes are:
•Enabled: Enable Voice VLAN security mode operation.
•Disabled: Disable Voice VLAN security mode operation.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
149
CHAPTER 21
Configuration: MAC Table
21.1 Overview
This section provides information for MAC Table in Configuration.
The MAC Table screen (a MAC table is also known as a filtering database) shows how frames are
forwarded or filtered across the Switch’s ports. When a device (which may belong to a VLAN group)
sends a packet which is forwarded to a port on the Switch, the MAC address of the device is shown on
the Switch’s MAC Table. It also shows whether the MAC address is dynamic (learned by the Switch) or
static (manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen).
21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The MAC Table screen displays Static MAC, Filtering MAC, and Dynamic MAC settings.
21.1.2 Static MAC
Use this screen to view Static MAC addresses settings. Click Configuration > MAC Table > Static MAC to
open this screen.
Figure 158 Configuration > MAC Table > Static MAC
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 90 Configuration > MAC Table > Static MAC
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Static MAC
MAC Address Displays the object MAC address from which this incoming frame came.
VLAN Displays the VLAN group to which this frame belongs.
Port Displays the port from which the above MAC address was learned.
Action Click Delete to remove the MAC address.
Add Click Add to create a new Static MAC entry.
Chapter 21 Configuration: MAC Table
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
150
21.1.3 Static MAC Address
Use this screen to add new Static MAC addresses. Click Configuration > MAC Table > Static MAC > Add
to open this screen.
Figure 159 Configuration > MAC Table > Static MAC > Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
21.1.4 Filtering MAC Address
Use this screen to view Filtering MAC addresses. Click Configuration > MAC Table > Filtering MAC to
open this screen.
Figure 160 Configuration > MAC Table > Filtering MAC
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 91 Configuration > MAC Table > Static MAC > Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Static MAC
MAC Address Enter the object MAC address.
VLAN Select the VLAN group which to associate the MAC address.
Port Select the port which to associate the above MAC address.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 92 Configuration > MAC Table > Filtering MAC
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Filtering MAC
MAC Address Displays the filtering object MAC address from which this incoming frame came.
VLAN Displays the VLAN group to which this frame belongs.
Action
Delete Click Delete to remove the entry.
Add Click Add to create a new Filtering MAC entry.
Chapter 21 Configuration: MAC Table
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
151
21.1.5 Filtering MAC Address (Add)
Use this screen to add new Filtering MAC addresses. Click Configuration > MAC Table > Filtering MAC >
Add to open this screen.
Figure 161 Configuration > MAC Table > Filtering MAC > Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
21.1.6 Dynamic Age
Use this screen to enter the Dynamic MAC Age. The dynamic MAC age is how long all dynamically
learned MAC addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out (and must be relearned).
Click Configuration > MAC Table > Dynamic Age to open this screen.
Figure 162 Configuration > MAC Table > Dynamic Age
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 93 Configuration > MAC Table > Filtering MAC > Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add Filtering MAC
MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the device.
VLAN Select the VLAN group to associate the filtering object MAC address.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 94 Configuration > MAC Table > Dynamic Age
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Dynamic MAC Age
Aging Time Enter the aging time of the MAC address. The value can be between 10 and 630 seconds.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
152
CHAPTER 22
Configuration: Link
Aggregation
22.1 Overview
This section provides information for Link Aggregation in Configuration.
This chapter shows you how to logically aggregate physical links to form one logical, higher bandwidth
link.
22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The Link Aggregation screen (Section 22.2 on page 152) displays global, LAG management, LAG port,
and LACP port settings.
22.2 Link Aggregation
Link aggregation (trunking) is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher-capacity link. You
may want to trunk ports if for example, it is cheaper to use multiple lower-speed links than to under-utilize
a high-speed, but more costly, single-port link.
However, the more ports you aggregate then the fewer available ports you have. A trunk group is one
logical link containing multiple ports.
The Switch supports both static and dynamic link aggregation.
Note: In a properly planned network, it is recommended to implement static link aggregation
only. This ensures increased network stability and control over the trunk groups on your
Switch.
22.2.1 Global Settings
Use this screen to configure global Link Aggregation settings. Click Configuration > Link Aggregation >
Global to open this screen.
Chapter 22 Configuration: Link Aggregation
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
153
Figure 163 Configuration > Link Aggregation > Global
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
22.2.2 LAG Management
Use this screen to view LAG management settings. Click Configuration > Link Aggregation > LAG
Management to open this screen.
Figure 164 Configuration > Link Aggregation > LAG Management
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 95 Configuration > Link Aggregation > Global
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Global
LACP State Select Enable to activate the link aggregation control protocol.
LACP System
Priority
LACP system priority is a number between 1 and 65,535. The switch with the lowest system
priority (and lowest port number if system priority is the same) becomes the LACP “server”. The
LACP “server” controls the operation of LACP setup. Enter a number to set the priority of an
active port using Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). The smaller the number, the higher
the priority level.
Load Balance
Algorithm
Select the outgoing traffic distribution type. Packets from the same source and/or to the same
destination are sent over the same link within the trunk. By default, the Switch uses the IP/MAC
Address distribution type. If the Switch is behind a router, the packet’s destination or source
MAC address will be changed. In this case, set the Switch to distribute traffic based on its IP
address to make sure port trunking can work properly.
Select MAC Address to distribute traffic based on a combination of the packet’s source and
destination MAC addresses.
Select IP/MAC Address to distribute traffic based on a combination of the packet’s source and
destination IP addresses.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 96 Configuration > Link Aggregation > LAG Management
LABEL DESCRIPTION
LAG Management
LAG Displays the link aggregation group (LAG), that is, one logical link containing multiple ports.
Name Displays the name of the link aggregation group.
Chapter 22 Configuration: Link Aggregation
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
154
22.2.3 LAG Management (Add)
Use this screen to add a LAG. Click Configuration > Link Aggregation > LAG Management > Add to open
this screen.
Figure 165 Configuration > Link Aggregation > LAG Management > Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Type This field displays how these ports were added to the trunk group. It displays:
Static – if the ports are configured as static members of a trunk group.
LACP – if the ports are configured to join a trunk group through LACP.
Link Status Displays link status as either Link up or Link down.
Active Member Displays if this member is an active member of a trunk.
Standby
Member
Displays if this member is an standby member of a trunk.
Action
Edit Click Edit to make changes to the entry.
Delete Click Delete to remove the entry.
Add Click Add to create a new LAG Management entry.
Table 96 Configuration > Link Aggregation > LAG Management (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 97 Configuration > Link Aggregation > LAG Management > Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
LAG Management
LAG Select the link aggregation group (LAG).
Name Enter the name of this entry.
Type Select Static or LACP.
Member Ports Select the member ports to be part of the LAG.
Chapter 22 Configuration: Link Aggregation
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
155
22.2.4 LAG Port
Use this screen to view LAG port settings. Click Configuration > Link Aggregation > LAG Port to open this
screen.
Figure 166 Configuration > Link Aggregation > LAG Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
22.2.5 LAG Port Edit
Use this screen to edit a LAG port. Click Configuration > Link Aggregation > LAG Port > Edit to open this
screen.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 97 Configuration > Link Aggregation > LAG Management > Add (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 98 Configuration > Link Aggregation > LAG Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
LAG Port
LAG Displays the LAG index value.
Name Displays the LAG name.
Port Type Displays the port type.
State Displays the state as Enable or Disable.
Speed Displays the speed value as Auto, Auto-10M, Auto-100M, Auto-1000M, Auto-10/100M, 10M,
100M, or 1000M.
Duplex Displays the duplex value as Full, Half, or Auto.
FlowCtrl State Displays whether flow control is Enable or Disable.
FlowCtrl Status Displays whether flow control is in use (Enable) or not (Disable).
Edit Select this check box to configure the properties of a port. Click the Edit button change the
properties of the port.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 22 Configuration: Link Aggregation
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
156
Figure 167 Configuration > Link Aggregation > LAG Port > Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
22.2.6 LACP Port
Use this screen to view LACP Port settings. Click Configuration > Link Aggregation > LACP Port to open
this screen.
Figure 168 Configuration > Link Aggregation > LACP Port
Table 99 Configuration > Link Aggregation > LAG Port > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
LAG Port
LAG Displays the LAG index values.
State Select the state to be Enable or Disable.
Speed Displays the speed value as Auto, 10M, 100M, or 1000M.
Flow Control Select Enable to use the flow control feature.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 22 Configuration: Link Aggregation
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
157
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
22.2.7 LACP Port Edit
Use this screen to edit a LACP Port. Click Configuration > Link Aggregation > LACP Port > Edit to open this
screen.
Figure 169 Configuration > Link Aggregation > LACP Port > Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 100 Configuration > Link Aggregation > LACP Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
LACP Port
Port Displays the port index number.
Priority Displays the priority value.
Timer (sec) Displays the Timer value in seconds.
Timeout is the time interval between the individual port exchanges of LACP packets in order to
check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up. If a port does not respond after three tries,
then it is deemed to be “down” and is removed from the trunk. Set a short timeout (one
second) for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from the trunk group as
soon as possible.
Edit Select this check box to configure the properties of a port. Click the Edit button change the
properties of the port.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 101 Configuration > Link Aggregation > LACP Port > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
LACP Port
Port List Displays the list of port index numbers to be configured.
Priority Enter a value for the port priority. The number can be between 1 and 65,535.
Timer Select a timer value of either 1 second or 30 seconds.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
158
CHAPTER 23
Configuration: Loop Guard
23.1 Overview
This section provides information for Loop Guard in Configuration.
This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to guard against loops on the edge of your network.
23.2 Loop Guard
Loop guard allows you to configure the Switch to shut down a port if it detects that packets sent out on
that port loop back to the Switch. While you can use Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) to prevent loops in the
core of your network. STP cannot prevent loops that occur on the edge of your network.
23.2.1 Global Settings
Use this screen to configure the global Loop Guard. Click Configuration > Loop Guard > Global to open
this screen.
Figure 170 Configuration > Loop Guard > Global
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 102 Configuration > Loop Guard > Global
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Global
State Select Enable to activate loop protection on this Switch.
Recovery Time Enter the period (in seconds) for which a port will be kept disabled in the event of a loop is
detected (and the port action shuts down the port).
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 23 Configuration: Loop Guard
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
159
23.2.2 Loop Guard Port
Use this screen to view the port’s Loop Guard settings. Click Configuration > Loop Guard > Port to open
this screen.
Figure 171 Configuration > Loop Guard > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
23.2.3 Port Edit
Use this screen to configure Loop Guard settings on a port. Click Configuration > Loop Guard > Port > Edit
to open this screen.
Figure 172 Configuration > Loop Guard > Port > Edit
Table 103 Configuration > Loop Guard > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Port Displays the port index number.
State Displays whether the loop guard feature is Enable or Disable on the port.
Action Displays the action to take by the Switch. The options are Log, Shutdown Port, and Shutdown
and Log.
Edit Select this check box to configure the properties of a port. Click the Edit button change the
properties of the port.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 23 Configuration: Loop Guard
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
160
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 104 Configuration > Loop Guard > Port > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Port List Displays the list of port index numbers to be configured.
State Select to enable or disable the loop guard feature on the port.
Action Select to have the Switch shut down a port and/or generate a log message if it detects that
packets sent out on that port loop back to the Switch.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
161
CHAPTER 24
Configuration: Mirror
24.1 Overview
This section provides information for Mirror in Configuration.
24.2 Mirror Settings
Port mirroring allows you to copy a traffic flow to a monitor port (the port you copy the traffic to) in order
that you can examine the traffic from the monitor port without interference.
The Switch supports local port mirroring.
24.2.1 Mirror
Use this screen to configure Mirroring. Click Configuration > Mirror to open this screen.
Chapter 24 Configuration: Mirror
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
162
Figure 173 Configuration > Mirror
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 105 Configuration > Mirror
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Mirror
Mirroring Select Enable to activate port mirroring on the Switch or Disable to disable the feature.
Monitor Port The monitor port is the port you copy the traffic to in order to examine it in more detail without
interfering with the traffic flow on the original ports. Type the port number of the monitor port.
Egress Specify the ports to mirror outgoing traffic.
Available Click < to move a severity type from the acting box to the available box.
Click > to move a severity type to the acting box from the available box.
Acting Click < to move a severity type from the acting box to the available box.
Click > to move a severity type to the acting box from the available box.
>Click > to move a severity type to the acting box from the available box.
<Click < to move a severity type from the acting box to the available box.
Ingress Specify the ports to mirror incoming traffic.
Available Click < to move a severity type from the acting box to the available box.
Click > to move a severity type to the acting box from the available box.
Acting Click < to move a severity type from the acting box to the available box.
Click > to move a severity type to the acting box from the available box.
>Click > to move a severity type to the acting box from the available box.
Chapter 24 Configuration: Mirror
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
163
<Click < to move a severity type from the acting box to the available box.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 105 Configuration > Mirror (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
164
CHAPTER 25
Configuration: Time Range
Group
25.1 Overview
You can set up one-time and recurring schedules for time-oriented features, such as PoE. The Switch
supports one-time and recurring schedules. One-time schedules are effective only once, while recurring
schedules usually repeat. Both types of schedules are based on the current date and time in the Switch.
25.1.1 What You Can Do
The Time Range Group screen (Section 25.2.1 on page 164) displays or defines a time range (schedule)
rule on the Switch.
25.2 Time Range Group
Use this screen to view or edit a time range rule on the Switch.
25.2.1 Time Range Group Settings
Use this screen to view the time range rules. Click Configuration > Time Range Group in the navigation
panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 174 Configuration > Time Range Group
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 106 Configuration > Time Range Group
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This field displays the index number of the rule.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule. This is for identification purpose only.
Type This field displays the type of the rule.
Chapter 25 Configuration: Time Range Group
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
165
25.2.2 Time Range Add
Use this screen to add a new time range (schedule) rule. Click Configuration > Time Range Group > Add
in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 175 Configuration > Time Range Group > Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Range This field displays the time periods to which this rule applies.
Action Click Edit to change the rule settings.
Click Delete to remove the rule.
Add Click Add to create a new time range rule.
Table 106 Configuration > Time Range Group (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 107 Configuration > Time Range Group > Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Enter a descriptive name for this rule for identifying purposes.
Type Select Absolute to create a one-time schedule. One-time schedules begin on a specific start
date and time and end on a specific stop date and time. One-time schedules are useful for
long holidays and vacation periods.
Alternatively, select Periodic to create a recurring schedule. Recurring schedules begin at a
specific start time and end at a specific stop time on selected days of the week (Sunday,
Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, and Saturday). Recurring schedules are useful
for defining the workday and off-work hours.
Absolute This section is available only when you set Type to Absolute.
Start Specify the year, month, day, hour and minute when the schedule begins.
End Specify the year, month, day, hour and minute when the schedule ends.
Periodic This section is available only when you set Type to Periodic.
Select the first option if you want to define a recurring schedule for a consecutive time period.
You then select the day of the week, hour and minute when the schedule begins and ends
respectively.
Select the second option if you want to define a recurring schedule for multiple non-
consecutive time periods. You need to select each day of the week the recurring schedule is
effective. You also need to specify the hour and minute when the schedule begins and ends
each day. The schedule begins and ends in the same day.
Chapter 25 Configuration: Time Range Group
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
166
25.2.3 Time Range Edit
Use this screen to modify an existing time range rule. Click Configuration > Time Range Group > Edit in
the navigation panel to display the screens as shown.
25.2.3.1 Edit an Absolute Time Range Rule
Click the Edit button in the Action field to modify an absolute time range rule.
Figure 176 Configuration > Time Range Group > Edit (Absolute)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
25.2.3.2 Edit a Periodic Time Range Rule
Click the Edit button in the Action field to modify a periodic time range rule. A screen will appear
showing the name, type, and range of this rule. Click the Edit button again to modify it, or you can click
the Add button to create a new range under a periodic time range rule.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Table 107 Configuration > Time Range Group > Add (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 108 Configuration > Time Range Group > Edit (Absolute)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule. This is for identification purpose only.
Type This field displays the type of the rule.
Range Specify the year, month, day, hour and minute when the schedule begins and ends.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Chapter 25 Configuration: Time Range Group
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
167
Figure 177 Configuration > Time Range Group > Edit (Periodic)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Figure 178 Configuration > Time Range Group > Edit (Periodic) > Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 109 Configuration > Time Range Group > Edit (Periodic)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Time Range Group
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule. This is for identification purpose only.
Type This field displays the type of the rule.
Index This field displays the index number of the rule.
Range This field displays the time periods to which this rule applies.
Action Click Edit to change the rule settings.
Click Delete to remove the rule.
Add Click Add to create a new range.
Table 110 Configuration > Time Range Group > Edit (Periodic) > Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Time Range Group
Name Enter a descriptive name for this rule for identifying purposes.
Type This field displays the type of the rule.
Range Select the first option if you want to define a recurring schedule for a consecutive time period.
You then select the day of the week, hour and minute when the schedule begins and ends
respectively.
Select the second option if you want to define a recurring schedule for multiple non-
consecutive time periods. You need to select each day of the week the recurring schedule is
effective. You also need to specify the hour and minute when the schedule begins and ends
each day. The schedule begins and ends in the same day.
Chapter 25 Configuration: Time Range Group
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
168
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Table 110 Configuration > Time Range Group > Edit (Periodic) > Add (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
169
CHAPTER 26
Configuration: Multicast
26.1 Overview
This section provides information for Multicast in Configuration.
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways – Unicast (1 sender to 1 recipient) or
Broadcast (1 sender to everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts
on the network.
26.2 IGMP Settings
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership
in an IPv4 multicast group – it is not used to carry user data. Refer to RFC 1112, RFC 2236 and RFC 3376 for
information on IGMP versions 1, 2 and 3 respectively.
26.2.1 Global Settings
Use this screen to view the IGMP Global settings. Click Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > Global to open
this screen.
Figure 179 Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > Global
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 111 Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > Global
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Global
Snooping State Select Enable to turn on IGMP packet snooping or Disable to turn snooping off.
Snooping
Version
Select v2 or v3 depending on the snooping version you require.
Chapter 26 Configuration: Multicast
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
170
26.2.2 VLAN Settings
Use this screen to view the IGMP VLAN settings. Click Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > VLAN to open
this screen.
Figure 180 Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Unknown
Multicast Action
Select to send the IPv4 unknown multicast frame to the router port. The following options are
available:
•Flood – select to send the frames to all ports.
•Drop – select to discard the frames.
•Router Port – select to send the frame to router port.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 111 Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > Global (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 112 Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IGMP Vlan
VLAN ID Displays the ID of a static VLAN; the valid range is between 1 and 4094.
State Display the status of the VLAN as enabled or disabled.
Router Ports Auto
Learn
Displays the Switch learn multicast router port member status of any VLANs as enabled or
disabled.
Query
Retry Displays the number of query retry times.
Interval Displays the amount of time (in seconds) between general query messages sent by the router
connected to the upstream port.
Max. Response
Interval (sec)
Displays the amount of time (in seconds) the router connected to the upstream port waits for a
response to an IGMP general query message.
Last Member Query
Count Displays the number of queries.
Interval Displays the amount of time (in milliseconds) between the IGMP group-specific queries sent by
an upstream port when an IGMP Done message is received.
Querier
State Displays the Switch current VLAN querier entry as Enable or Disable.
Version Displays the Switch current VLAN querier entry version.
Edit Click Edit to change the properties of the IGMP VLAN entry.
Chapter 26 Configuration: Multicast
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
171
26.2.3 Edit IGMP
Use this screen to configure the IGMP VLAN settings. Click Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > VLAN > Edit
to open this screen.
Figure 181 Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > VLAN > Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 113 Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > VLAN > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IGMP Edit
VLAN List Enter the ID of a static VLAN; the valid range is between 1 and 4094.
IGMP State Select the status of the VLAN to Enable or Disable the function.
Router Ports Auto
Learn
Select Enabled to have the Switch learn multicast router membership information of any VLANs
automatically.
Query Retry Enter the number of query retry times. The value can be between 1 and 7.
Query Interval Enter the amount of time (in seconds) between general query messages sent by the router
connected to the upstream port. The value can be between 30 and 18000.
Query Max.
Response
Interval
Enter the amount of time (in seconds) the router connected to the upstream port waits for a
response to an IGMP general query message.
Last Member
Query Count
Enter the number of queries.
Last Member
Query Interval
Enter the amount of time (in seconds) between the IGMP group-specific queries sent by an
upstream port when an IGMP Done message is received.
IGMP Querier
State
Select the IGMP querier status to Enable or Disable the function.
IGMP Querier
Version
Select the IGMP Querier version to v2 or v3.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 26 Configuration: Multicast
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
172
26.2.4 Router Port
Use this screen to view the Router Port settings. Click Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > Router Port to
open this screen.
Figure 182 Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > Router Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
26.2.5 Add or Edit Router Port
Use this screen to configure the Router Port settings. Click Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > Router Port
> Add or Edit to open this screen.
Table 114 Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > Router Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Router Port
VLAN ID Displays the ID of a static VLAN; the valid range is between 1 and 4094.
Static Router
Ports
Displays the ports that are defined as static router ports.
Forbidden
Router Ports
Displays the ports that are defined as forbidden router ports.
Action
Edit Click Edit to make changes to the entry.
Delete Click Delete to remove the entry.
Add Click Add to create a new Router Port entry.
Chapter 26 Configuration: Multicast
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
173
Figure 183 Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > Router Port > Add or Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
26.2.6 Profile Settings
Use this screen to view the IGMP Profile settings. Click Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > Profile to open
this screen.
Figure 184 Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > Profile
Table 115 Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > Router Port > Add or Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IGMP Router Edit
VLAN List Enter the static VLAN IDs (valid range for each ID value is between 1 and 4094).
Static Router
Ports Selects
Select the ports to be static router ports.
Forbidden
Router Ports
Selects
Select the ports to be forbidden router ports.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 26 Configuration: Multicast
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
174
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
26.2.7 Add or Edit Profile
Use this screen to configure the IGMP Profile settings. Click Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > Profile >
Add or Edit to open this screen.
Figure 185 Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > Profile > Add or Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
26.2.8 Throttling Settings
Use this screen to view the Throttling settings. Click Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > Throttling to open
this screen.
Table 116 Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IGMP Profile
Profile Displays the Profile index number.
Group From Displays the profile start group IP address.
Group To Displays the profile end group IP address.
Match Action Displays the action of the profile as Permit or Deny.
Action
Edit Click Edit to make changes to the entry.
Delete Click Delete to remove the entry.
Add Click Add to create a new IGMP Profile entry.
Table 117 Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > Profile > Add or Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IGMP Profile
Profile Enter the Profile index number.
Group From Enter the profile start group IP address.
Group To Enter the profile end group IP address.
Match Action Select the action of the profile as to be Permit or Deny.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 26 Configuration: Multicast
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
175
Figure 186 Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > Throttling
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
26.2.9 Edit Throttling
Use this screen to configure the Throttling settings. Click Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > Throttling >
Edit to open this screen.
Table 118 Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > Throttling
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IGMP Port Throttling
Port Displays the port index value.
Max. Groups Displays the maximum number of groups.
Exceed Group
Number Action
Displays the action taken by the groups as Permit or Deny.
Filter Profile ID Displays the throttling filter profile ID.
Edit Select this check box to configure the properties of a port. Click the Edit button change the
properties of the port.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 26 Configuration: Multicast
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
176
Figure 187 Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > Throttling > Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 119 Configuration > Multicast > IGMP > Throttling > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IGMP Port Throttling
Port List Enter the port index values.
Max. Groups Enter the maximum number of groups. Enter a value between 0 and 256.
Exceed Group
Number Action
Select the action taken by the groups to be Deny or Replace.
Filter Profile ID Select the throttling filter profile ID from the dropdown list.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
177
CHAPTER 27
Configuration: Spanning Tree
27.1 Overview
This section provides information for Spanning Tree in Configuration.
The Switch supports Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) and Multiple
Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) as defined in the following standards.
• IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol
• IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
• IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
The Switch also allows you to set up multiple STP configurations (or trees). Ports can then be assigned to
the trees.
27.2 Spanning Tree
(R)STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches, bridges or
routers. It allows a switch to interact with other (R)STP-compliant switches in your network to ensure that
only one path exists between any two stations on the network.
27.2.1 Global Settings
Use this screen to view the Global settings. Click Configuration > Spanning Tree > Global to open this
screen.
Figure 188 Configuration > Spanning Tree > Global
Chapter 27 Configuration: Spanning Tree
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
178
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
27.2.2 STP Port
Use this screen to view the STP Port settings. Click Configuration > Spanning Tree > STP Port to open this
screen.
Figure 189 Configuration > Spanning Tree > STP Port
Table 120 Configuration > Spanning Tree > Global
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Global
State Select to Enable or Disable the Spanning-Tree function.
BPDU Forward Select the bridge protocol data units forward (BPDU) option to be Flooding or Filtering.
Path Cost
Method
Select Short or Long as a Path Cost method.
Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port. It is recommended
that you assign this value according to the speed of the bridge. The slower the media, the
higher the cost.
Version Select the type of spanning tree protocol to use. The following options are available:
•STP
•RSTP
•MSTP
Configuration
Name
Enter the name of the configuration in hexadecimal. The maximum number characters is 32.
Configuration
Revision
Enter the revision number of configuration. The number can be between 0 and 65535.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 27 Configuration: Spanning Tree
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
179
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
27.2.3 STP Port Edit
Use this screen to configure the STP Port Edit settings. Click Configuration > Spanning Tree > STP Port > Edit
to open this screen.
Figure 190 Configuration > Spanning Tree > STP Port > Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 121 Configuration > Spanning Tree > STP Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
STP Port
Port Displays the index number of the STP port.
State Display the status of the STP port as enabled or disabled.
External Cost Displays the external path cost.
Edge Port Displays the edge port status as Yes or No.
BPDU Filter Displays the BPDU filter status as Yes or No.
P2P MAC Displays the P2P MAC status as Yes or No.
Edit Select this check box to configure the properties of a port. Click the Edit button change the
properties of the port.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 122 Configuration > Spanning Tree > STP Port > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
STP Port
Port List Enter the index number of the STP ports.
External Path
Cost (0=Auto)
Enter the external path cost. Enter 0 for Auto.
State Select the state of the STP port as enabled or disabled.
Edge Port Select this check box to configure a port as an edge port when it is directly attached to a
computer. An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to forwarding state
immediately without going through listening and learning states right after the port is configured
as an edge port or when its link status changes.
Note: An edge port becomes a non-edge port as soon as it receives a
Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU).
BPDU Filter Select Yes to activate BPDU filter or No to deactivate it.
Chapter 27 Configuration: Spanning Tree
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
180
27.2.4 CIST Settings
Use this screen to view the CIST settings. Click Configuration > Spanning Tree > CIST to open this screen.
Figure 191 Configuration > Spanning Tree > CIST
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
P2P MAC Select Yes to activate P2P MAC or No to deactivate it.
Migrate Select Yes to activate Migrate or No to deactivate it.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 122 Configuration > Spanning Tree > STP Port > Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 123 Configuration > Spanning Tree > CIST
LABEL DESCRIPTION
CIST Instance
Priority Configure priority of CIST bridge ID.
Priority is part of bridge ID, used for CIST root bridge selection.
Max Hops Enter a maximum number of hops value. The value can be between 1 and 40.
Forward Delay This is the maximum time (in seconds) a switch will wait before changing states. This delay is
required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it
starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting information
that would make it return to a blocking state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result. The
allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds.
As a general rule:
2 * (Forward Delay - 1) >= Max Age >= 2 * (Hello Time + 1)
Max Age This is the maximum time (in seconds) a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before
attempting to reconfigure. All switch ports (except for designated ports) should receive BPDUs
at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STP information (provided in the last BPDU) becomes
the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root port is selected from
among the switch ports attached to the network. The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds.
Tx Hold Count Enter a transmission hold count value. The value can be between 1 and 10.
Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units) configuration
message generations by the root switch. The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 27 Configuration: Spanning Tree
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
181
27.2.5 CIST Port
Use this screen to view the CIST Port settings. Click Configuration > Spanning Tree > CIST Port to open this
screen.
Figure 192 Configuration > Spanning Tree > CIST Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
27.2.6 CIST Port Edit
Use this screen to configure the CIST Port Edit settings. Click Configuration > Spanning Tree > CIST Port >
Edit to open this screen.
Table 124 Configuration > Spanning Tree > CIST Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
CIST Port
Port Displays the index number of the STP port.
Priority Displays the priority for each port here.
External Path
Cost
Displays the external path cost.
Internal Path
Cost
Displays the internal path cost.
Edit Select this check box to configure the properties of a port. Click the Edit button change the
properties of the port.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 27 Configuration: Spanning Tree
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
182
Figure 193 Configuration > Spanning Tree > CIST Port > Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
27.2.7 MST Settings
Use this screen to view the MST settings. Click Configuration > Spanning Tree > MST to open this screen.
Figure 194 Configuration > Spanning Tree > MST
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 125 Configuration > Spanning Tree > CIST Port > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
STP CIST Port
Port List Enter the index number of the STP ports.
Priority Configure the priority for each port here.
Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a
switch. Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first. The allowed range is between
0 and 255 and the default value is 128.
Internal Path
Cost (0=Auto)
Enter the internal path cost. Enter 0 or Auto.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 126 Configuration > Spanning Tree > MST
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MST Instance
MSTI This displays the Multiple Spanning Tree Instances (MSTI).
VLAN List This displays a list of MSTI VLANs.
VLAN Count This displays the VLAN count.
Priority This displays the priority for each port here.
Action
Edit Click Edit to make changes to the entry.
Delete Click Delete to remove the entry.
Add Click Add to create a new MST Instance entry.
Chapter 27 Configuration: Spanning Tree
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
183
27.2.8 Add or Edit MST
Use this screen to configure the MST settings. Click Configuration > Spanning Tree > MST > Add or Edit to
open this screen.
Figure 195 Configuration > Spanning Tree > MST > Add or Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
27.2.9 MST Port Settings
Use this screen to view the MST Port settings. Click Configuration > Spanning Tree > MST Port to open this
screen.
Table 127 Configuration > Spanning Tree > MST > Add or Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MST Instance
MST ID Select a Multiple Spanning Tree Instance (MSTI) ID.
VLAN List Enter a MSTI VLAN ID
Priority Select a MSTI bridge ID priority value.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 27 Configuration: Spanning Tree
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
184
Figure 196 Configuration > Spanning Tree > MST Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
27.2.10 MST Port Edit
Use this screen to configure the MST Port Edit settings. Click Configuration > Spanning Tree > MST Port >
Edit to open this screen.
Table 128 Configuration > Spanning Tree > MST Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MST Port
MST ID Select the MST port ID number from the dropdown list.
Port This displays the index number of the MST port.
MSTI ID This displays the index value of the MSTI.
Priority This displays the priority for each port.
Internal Path
Cost
This displays the internal path cost.
Edit Select this check box to configure the properties of a port. Click the Edit button change the
properties of the port.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 27 Configuration: Spanning Tree
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
185
Figure 197 Configuration > Spanning Tree > MST Port > Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 129 Configuration > Spanning Tree > MST Port > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
STP MST Port
MST ID This displays the MST ID number.
Port List Enter the index number of the MTP ports.
Priority Configure the priority for each port here.
Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a
switch. Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first. The allowed range is between
0 and 255 and the default value is 128.
Internal Path
Cost (0=Auto)
Enter the internal path cost. Enter 0 for Auto.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
186
CHAPTER 28
Configuration: LLDP
28.1 Overview
This section provides information for LLDP in Configuration.
Use the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) screens to configure LLDP Switch settings.
28.2 LLDP Settings
This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings.
28.2.1 Global Settings
Use this screen to configure the Global settings. Click Configuration > LLDP > Global to open this screen.
Figure 198 Configuration > LLDP > Global
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 130 Configuration > LLDP > Global
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Global
State Select Enable to activate the global LLDP.
Transmission
Interval
Enter the transmission interval value.
The switch periodically transmits LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the network discovery
information up-to-date. The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Tx Interval
value. Valid values are restricted to 5 – 32768 seconds.
Chapter 28 Configuration: LLDP
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
187
28.2.2 Port Settings
Use this screen to view the Port settings. Click Configuration > LLDP > Port to open this screen.
Hold Multiplier Enter the hold multiplier value.
Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall
be considered valid. The LLDP information valid period is set to Tx Hold multiplied by Tx Interval
seconds. Valid values are restricted to 2 – 10 times.
Reinitialization
Delay
Enter the re-initialization delay value.
When a port is disabled, LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted, an LLDP shutdown frame is
transmitted to the neighboring units, signaling that the LLDP information is not valid anymore. Tx
Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP
initialization. Valid values are restricted to 1 – 10 seconds.
Transmit Delay Enter the transmission delay value.
If some configuration is changed (for example, the IP address) a new LLDP frame is transmitted,
but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Tx Delay seconds. Tx
Delay cannot be larger than 1/4 of the Tx Interval value. Valid values are restricted to 1 – 8192
seconds.
LLDP-MED Fast
Start Repeat
Count
Enter the LLDP-MED fast start repeat count value.
Because there is a risk of an LLDP frame being lost during transmission between neighbors, it is
recommended to repeat the fast start transmission multiple times to increase the possibility of
the neighbors receiving the LLDP frame. With Fast start repeat count it is possible to specify the
number of times the fast start transmission would be repeated. The recommended value is four
times, given that four LLDP frames with a 1 second interval will be transmitted, when an LLDP
frame with new information is received.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 130 Configuration > LLDP > Global (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 28 Configuration: LLDP
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
188
Figure 199 Configuration > LLDP > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
28.2.3 Port Edit
Use this screen to configure the Port Edit settings. Click Configuration > LLDP > Port > Edit to open this
screen.
Table 131 Configuration > LLDP > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
LLDP VLAN
Port Displays the index number of the LLDP port.
Mode Displays the mode of the LLDP port as Disable, Tx Only, Rx Only, or Tx & Rx.
Optional TLV
Select
Displays the TLV as one or more of the following options:
• SN – System Name
• PD – Port Description
• SD – System Description
• SC – System Capability
• MP – 802.3 MAC-PHY
• LA – 802.3 Link Aggregation
• MFS – 802.3 Maximum Frame Size
• MA – Management Address
Edit Select this check box to configure the properties of a port. Click the Edit button change the
properties of the port.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 28 Configuration: LLDP
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
189
Figure 200 Configuration > LLDP > Port > Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
28.2.4 Local Information Settings
Use this screen to view the Local Information settings. Click Configuration > LLDP > Local Information to
open this screen.
Table 132 Configuration > LLDP > Port > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
LLDP Port
Port List Displays the index number of the LLDP ports.
Mode Select the mode of the LLDP port as Disable, Tx Only, Rx Only, or Tx & Rx.
Optional TLV
Select
Select the TLV as one or more of the following options:
•SN – System Name
•PD – Port Description
•SD – System Description
•SC – System Capability
•MP – 802.3 MAC-PHY
•LA – 802.3 Link Aggregation
•MFS – 802.3 Maximum Frame Size
•MA – Management Address
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 28 Configuration: LLDP
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
190
Figure 201 Configuration > LLDP > Local Information
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 133 Configuration > LLDP > Local Information
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Local Information
Chassis ID
Subtype
Displays the chassis ID subtype.
Chassis ID The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor's LLDP frames.
System Name System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit.
System
Description
Displays the System Description.
Chapter 28 Configuration: LLDP
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
191
28.2.5 Local Information Edit
Use this screen to configure the Port Edit settings. Click Configuration > LLDP > Local Information > Edit to
open this screen.
Capabilities
Supported Capabilities Supported describes the neighbor unit's capabilities. The possible capabilities are:
1. Other
2. Repeater
3. Bridge
4. WLAN Access Point
5. Router
6. Telephone
7. DOCSIS cable device
8. Station only
9. Reserved
When a capability is enabled, the capability is followed by (+). If the capability is disabled, the
capability is followed by (–).
Capabilities
Enable
Displays which capability is enabled.
Port ID Subtype Displays the Port ID Subtype.
MED Port Location
Port Displays the index number of the LLDP ports.
Coordinate Displays the location coordinate of the LLDP ports.
Civic Address Displays the location of the civic addresses in hexadecimal.
ECS ELIN Emergency Call Service (for example, E911 and others), such as defined by TIA or NENA.
Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the ELIN identifier as used
during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk-based PSAP. This format
consists of a numerical digit string, corresponding to the ELIN to be used for emergency calling.
Edit Select this check box to configure the properties of a port. Click the Edit button change the
properties of the port.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 133 Configuration > LLDP > Local Information (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 28 Configuration: LLDP
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
192
Figure 202 Configuration > LLDP > Local Information > Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 134 Configuration > LLDP > Local Information > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MED Port Location
Port List Displays the index number of the LLDP ports. The value is made of 16 pairs of hexadecimal
characters.
Location Coordinates
Latitude Latitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 – 90 degrees with a maximum of four digits.
It is possible to specify the direction to either North of the equator or South of the equator.
Chapter 28 Configuration: LLDP
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
193
Longitude Longitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 – 180 degrees with a maximum of four digits.
It is possible to specify the direction to either East of the prime meridian or West of the prime
meridian.
Altitude Altitude SHOULD be normalized to within –32767 to 32767 with a maximum of four digits.
It is possible to select between two altitude types (floors or meters).
Meters: Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum specified.
Floors: Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which have different floor-to-
floor dimensions. An altitude = 0.0 is meaningful even outside a building, and represents ground
level at the given latitude and longitude. Inside a building, 0.0 represents the floor level
associated with ground level at the main entrance.
Map Datum The Map Datum is used for the coordinates given in these options:
WGS84: (Geographical 3D) – World Geodesic System 1984, CRS Code 4327, Prime Meridian
Name: Greenwich.
NAD83/NAVD88: North American Datum 1983, CRS Code 4269, Prime Meridian Name:
Greenwich; The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum of 1988
(NAVD88). This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on land, not near tidal
water (which would use Datum = NAD83/MLLW).
NAD83/MLLW: North American Datum 1983, CRS Code 4269, Prime Meridian Name: Greenwich;
The associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water (MLLW). This datum pair is to be used
when referencing locations on water/sea/ocean.
Location Civic
Address
IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information (Civic Address LCI).
•Country code: The two-letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters – Example: DK,
DE or US.
•State: National subdivisions (state, canton, region, province, prefecture).
•County: County, parish, gun (Japan), district.
•City: City, township, shi (Japan) – Example: Copenhagen.
•City district: City division, borough, city district, ward, chou (Japan).
•Block (Neighborhood): Neighborhood, block.
•Street: Street – Example: Poppelvej.
•Leading street direction: Leading street direction – Example: N.
•Trailing street suffix: Trailing street suffix – Example: SW.
•Street suffix: Street suffix - Example: Ave, Platz.
•House no.: House number – Example: 21.
•House no. suffix: House number suffix – Example: A, 1/2.
•Landmark: Landmark or vanity address – Example: Columbia University.
•Additional location info: Additional location info – Example: South Wing.
•Name: Name (residence and office occupant) – Example: Flemming Jahn.
•Zip code: Postal/zip code – Example: 2791.
•Building: Building (structure) – Example: Low Library.
•Apartment: Unit (Apartment, suite) – Example: Apt 42.
•Floor: Floor – Example: 4.
•Room no.: Room number – Example: 450F.
•Place type: Place type – Example: Office.
•Postal community name: Postal community name – Example: Leonia.
•P.O. Box: Post office box (P.O. BOX) – Example: 12345.
Location ECS
ELIN
Emergency Call Service (for example, E911 and others), such as defined by TIA or NENA.
Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the ELIN identifier as used
during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk-based PSAP. This format
consists of a numerical digit string, corresponding to the ELIN to be used for emergency calling.
Table 134 Configuration > LLDP > Local Information > Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 28 Configuration: LLDP
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
194
28.2.6 MED Network Policy
Use this screen to view the MED Network Policy settings. Click Configuration > LLDP > MED Network Policy
to open this screen.
Figure 203 Configuration > LLDP > MED Network Policy
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
28.2.7 MED Network Policy Add or Edit
Use this screen to configure the Port Edit settings. Click Configuration > LLDP > MED Network Policy > Add
or Edit to open this screen.
Figure 204 Configuration > LLDP > MED Network Policy > Add or Edit
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 134 Configuration > LLDP > Local Information > Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 135 Configuration > LLDP > MED Network Policy
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Network Policy Configuration
No. Displays index of network policy.
Application Displays the Application type indicating the primary function of the applications.
VLAN ID Displays the VLAN ID (VID) for the port as defined in IEEE 802.1Q-2003.
VLAN Tag Displays the VLAN Tag value as Tagged or Untagged.
L2 Priority Displays the L2 priority layer value.
DSCP Value Displays the DSCP Value.
Action
Edit Click Edit to make changes to the entry.
Delete Click Delete to remove the entry.
Add Click Add to create a new Network Policy Configuration entry.
Chapter 28 Configuration: LLDP
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
195
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 136 Configuration > LLDP > MED Network Policy > Add or Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
New Network Policy
No. Select the index of network policy
Application Select the Application type indicating the primary function of the applications defined for this
network policy, advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device. The possible
application types are shown below.
1. Voice – for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting
interactive voice services. These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for
ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications.
2. Voice Signaling – for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice
signaling than for the voice media.
3. Guest Voice – to support a separate limited feature-set voice service for guest users and
visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting
interactive voice services.
4. Guest Voice Signaling – for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the
guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media.
5. Softphone Voice – for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices, such
as PCs or laptops.
6. Video Conferencing – for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other
similar appliances supporting real-time interactive video or audio services.
7. Streaming Video – for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and
other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network
policy treatment. Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an
intended use of this application type.
8. Video Signaling – for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video
signaling than for the video media.
VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID (VID) for the port as defined in IEEE 802.1Q-2003. A value of 1 through 4094 is
used to define a valid VLAN ID. A value of 0 (Priority Tagged) is used if the device is using priority
tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003, meaning that only the IEEE 802.1D priority level is
significant and the default PVID of the ingress port is used instead.
VLAN Tag TAG is indicative of whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged
VLAN. Select Tagged or Untagged.
Untagged: The device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag
header as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003.
Tagged: The device is using the IEEE 802.1Q tagged frame format.
L2 Priority Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type. One of the eight
priority levels (0 through 7).
DSCP Value DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified
application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474. Contain one of 64 code point values (0 through
63).
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 28 Configuration: LLDP
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
196
28.2.8 MED Port
Use this screen to view the MED Port settings. Click Configuration > LLDP > MED Port to open this screen.
Figure 205 Configuration > LLDP > MED Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
28.2.9 MED Port Edit
Use this screen to configure the MED Port Edit settings. Click Configuration > LLDP > MED Port > Edit to
open this screen.
Table 137 Configuration > LLDP > MED Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MED Port
Port Displays the MED Port value.
State Displays the state of the MED port as Enable or Disable.
Network Policy Displays the Network Policy value.
Location Displays the Location value.
PoE Displays the PoE value.
Inventory Displays the Inventory value.
Edit Select this check box to configure the properties of a port. Click the Edit button change the
properties of the port.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 28 Configuration: LLDP
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
197
Figure 206 Configuration > LLDP > MED Port > Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 138 Configuration > LLDP > MED Port > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MED Port
Port List Displays the Port List.
State Select Enable to activate the MED Port feature.
MED Optional
TLVs
Select one or more of the MED Optional TLVs:
• Network Policy
• Location
•PoE PSE
•Inventory
MED Network
Policy
Select one or more of the MED Network Policies in Available and move them to Acting to
activate.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
198
CHAPTER 29
Configuration: QoS
29.1 Overview
This section provides information for QoS (Quality of Service) in Configuration.
29.2 General Settings
Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network's ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and the
networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth. Without QoS, all traffic data is equally likely
to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network performance and
make the network inadequate for time-critical application such as video-on-demand.
29.2.1 Port Settings
Use this screen to view the Port settings. Click Configuration > QoS > General > Port to open this screen.
Chapter 29 Configuration: QoS
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
199
Figure 207 Configuration > QoS > General > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
29.2.2 Port Edit
Use this screen to configure the Port Edit settings. Click Configuration > QoS > General > Port > Edit to
open this screen.
Table 139 Configuration > QoS > General > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
QoS Port
Port Displays the QoS port list.
CoS Value Displays the CoS value, range: 0 – 7.
Remark CoS Displays if this function is disabled or enabled.
Remark DSCP Displays if this function is disabled or enabled.
Remark IP
Precedence
Displays if this function is disabled or enabled.
Edit Select this check box to configure the properties of a port. Click the Edit button change the
properties of the port.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 29 Configuration: QoS
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
200
Figure 208 Configuration > QoS > General > Port > Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
29.2.3 Queue Settings
Use this screen to view the Queue settings. Click Configuration > QoS > General > Queue to open this
screen.
Figure 209 Configuration > QoS > General > Queue
Table 140 Configuration > QoS > General > Port > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
QoS Port
Port List Displays the index number of the QoS ports.
CoS Value Select the CoS Value from the dropdown list.
CoS Remark Select Enable to activate CoS Remark.
DSCP Remark Select Enable to activate DSCP Remark.
IP Precedence
Remark
Select Enable to activate IP Precedence Remark.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 29 Configuration: QoS
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
201
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
29.2.4 CoS Mapping
Use this screen to configure the CoS Mapping settings. Click Configuration > QoS > General > CoS
Mapping to open this screen.
Figure 210 Configuration > QoS > General > CoS Mapping
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 141 Configuration > QoS > General > Queue
LABEL DESCRIPTION
QoS Queue
Queue ID Displays the Queue ID value.
Schedule
Algorithm
Select the Schedule Algorithm as Strict or WRR.
Weight (1-127) Enter the weight of the QoS item.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 142 Configuration > QoS > General > CoS Mapping
LABEL DESCRIPTION
CoS to Queue Mapping
Class of Service (CoS) Displays a listing of the CoS, range: 0 – 7.
Chapter 29 Configuration: QoS
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
202
29.2.5 DSCP Mapping
Use this screen to configure the DSCP Mapping settings. Click Configuration > QoS > General > DSCP
Mapping to open this screen.
Figure 211 Configuration > QoS > General > DSCP Mapping
Queue ID (0-7) Click the drop-down menu to map the CoS to a specific Queue ID.
Queue to CoS Mapping
Queue ID Displays a listing of the Queue ID, range: 0 – 7.
Class of Service (CoS) (0–7) Click the drop-down menu to map the Queue ID to a specific CoS.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 142 Configuration > QoS > General > CoS Mapping (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 29 Configuration: QoS
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
203
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
29.2.6 IP Precedence Mapping
Use this screen to configure the IP Precedence Mapping settings. Click Configuration > QoS > General >
IP Precedence Mapping to open this screen.
Figure 212 Configuration > QoS > General > IP Precedence Mapping
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 143 Configuration > QoS > General > DSCP Mapping
LABEL DESCRIPTION
DSCP Mapping
DSCP to Queue Mapping
Queue ID Displays the DSCP Queue ID value.
Queue to DSCP Mapping
DSCP (0-63) Select the DSCP mapping value from the dropdown list.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 144 Configuration > QoS > General > IP Precedence Mapping
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IP Precedence Mapping
IP Precedence to Queue Mapping
Chapter 29 Configuration: QoS
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
204
29.3 Trust Mode
29.3.1 Global Settings
Use this screen to view the Global settings. Click Configuration > QoS > Trust Mode > Global to open this
screen.
Figure 213 Configuration > QoS > Trust Mode > Global
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
29.3.2 Port Settings
Use this screen to view the Port settings. Click Configuration > QoS > Trust Mode > Port to open this
screen.
IP Precedence Displays a listing of IP Precedence, range: 0 – 7.
Queue ID (0–7) Click the drop-down menu to map an IP Precedence designation to a specific Queue ID (0 – 7).
Queue to IP Precedence Mapping
Queue ID Displays a listing of Queue ID, range: 0 – 7.
IP Precedence
(0–7)
Click the drop-down menu to map a Queue ID to a specific IP precedence.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 144 Configuration > QoS > General > IP Precedence Mapping (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 145 Configuration > QoS > Trust Mode > Global
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Global
Trust Mode Select the Trust Mode from the dropdown list.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 29 Configuration: QoS
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
205
Figure 214 Configuration > QoS > Trust Mode > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
29.3.3 Trust Mode Edit
Use this screen to configure the Trust Mode settings. Click Configuration > QoS > Trust Mode > Port > Edit
to open this screen.
Figure 215 Configuration > QoS > Trust Mode > Port > Edit
Table 146 Configuration > QoS > Trust Mode > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
QoS Port
Port Displays the port index value.
Mode Displays the Trust status as Trust or Untrust.
Edit Select this check box to configure the properties of a port. Click the Edit button change the
properties of the port.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 29 Configuration: QoS
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
206
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 147 Configuration > QoS > Trust Mode > Port > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
QoS Port
Port List Displays the port index values.
Mode Select the Trust Mode for the QoS port list as Trust or Untrust.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
207
CHAPTER 30
Configuration: Security
30.1 Overview
This section provides information for Security in Configuration.
30.2 Port Security
30.2.1 Global Settings
Use this screen to view the Global settings. Click Configuration > Security > Port Security > Global to open
this screen.
Figure 216 Configuration > Security > Port Security > Global
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
30.2.2 Port Settings
Use this screen to view the Port settings. Click Configuration > Security > Port Security > Port to open this
screen.
Table 148 Configuration > Security > Port Security > Global
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Global
State Select the global security setting to be enabled or disabled.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 30 Configuration: Security
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
208
Figure 217 Configuration > Security > Port Security > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
30.2.3 Port Edit
Use this screen to configure the Port settings. Select the ports you want to configure and then click Edit in
the Configuration > Security > Port Security > Port screen to open this screen.
Table 149 Configuration > Security > Port Security > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Port Displays the port index value.
State Displays the Trust status as Enable or Disable.
Max. MAC Entry
Number
Displays the designated maximum number of allowed MAC entries. The maximum MAC entry
number can be learned for individual ports.
Action Displays the Action as Discard or Shutdown.
Edit Select this check box to configure the properties of a port. Click the Edit button change the
properties of the port.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 30 Configuration: Security
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
209
Figure 218 Configuration > Security > Port Security > Port > Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
30.3 Port Isolation
30.3.1 Port Isolation Settings
Use this screen to view the Port settings. Click Configuration > Security > Port Isolation to open this screen.
Figure 219 Configuration > Security > Port Isolation
Table 150 Configuration > Security > Port Security > Port > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Security
Port List Displays the port index value.
State Select Enable or Disable for the Trust status.
Max MAC Entry
Number
Enter the maximum MAC entry number (maximum MAC entry number can be learned for
individual ports).
Action Select the Action as Discard or Shutdown.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 30 Configuration: Security
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
210
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
30.3.2 Port Isolation Edit
Use this screen to configure the Port settings. Click Configuration > Security > Port Isolation > Edit to open
this screen.
Figure 220 Configuration > Security > Port Isolation > Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
30.4 802.1X Settings
30.4.1 Global Settings
Use this screen to view the Global settings. Click Configuration > Security > 802.1X > Global to open this
screen.
Figure 221 Configuration > Security > 802.1X > Global
Table 151 Configuration > Security > Port Isolation
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Isolation
Port Displays the port index value.
State Displays the Trust status as Enable or Disable.
Edit Select this check box to configure the properties of a port. Click the Edit button change the
properties of the port.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 152 Configuration > Security > Port Isolation > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Isolation
Port List Displays the port list index values.
State Select Enable or Disable for the Protected Port status.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 30 Configuration: Security
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
211
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
30.4.2 Port Settings
Use this screen to view the Port settings. Click Configuration > Security > 802.1X > Port to open this screen.
Figure 222 Configuration > Security > 802.1X > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 153 Configuration > Security > 802.1X > Global
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Global
State Select the 802.1X security setting to be enabled or disabled.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 154 Configuration > Security > 802.1X > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Port Displays the port index value.
State Displays the Trust status as enabled or disabled.
Reauthentication Displays if Reauthentication function is enabled. If enabled, the subscriber has to periodically
re-enter his or her user name and password to stay connected to the port.
Reauthentication
Period
Displays the Reauthentication period for the function: the period of time when a client has to
re-enter his or her user name and password to stay connected to the port.
Quiet Period Display the time out period to transmit request after receiving a rejection from the server.
Supplicant Time
out
Display the time out period to transmit a request when the client does not respond.
Chapter 30 Configuration: Security
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
212
30.4.3 Port Edit
Use this screen to configure the Port settings. Click Configuration > Security > 802.1X > Port > Edit to open
this screen.
Figure 223 Configuration > Security > 802.1X > Port > Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Maximum Request
Retries
Enter the maximum number of request retries.
Edit Select this check box to configure the properties of a port. Click the Edit button change the
properties of the port.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 154 Configuration > Security > 802.1X > Port (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 155 Configuration > Security > 802.1X > Port > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
802.1X Port
Port List Displays the port index value.
State Displays the Trust status as enabled or disabled.
Reauthentication
State
Specify if a subscriber has to periodically re-enter his or her user name and password to stay
connected to the port. Select Enable to activate feature.
Reauthentication
Period
Specify how often a client has to re-enter his or her user name and password to stay
connected to the port.
Quiet Period Display the time out period to transmit request after receiving a rejection from the sever.
Supplicant Period Display the time out period to transmit a request when the client does not respond.
Maximum Request
Retries
Enter the maximum number of request retries.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 30 Configuration: Security
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
213
30.5 DoS Settings
The Switch protects against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks, such as Scan attack and Ping of Death. The
goal of DoS attacks is not to steal information, but to disable a device or network on the Internet.
By default, the DoS feature is disabled. You need to enable it on the Switch and its ports. See Table 159
on page 215 for the types of DoS attacks that the Switch prevents when you turn on this feature. You
cannot set the Switch to block a specific type of DoS attacks.
Note: DoS protection does not work on LACP-enabled ports.
30.5.1 Global Settings
Use this screen to view the Global settings. Click Configuration > Security > DoS > Global to open this
screen.
Figure 224 Configuration > Security > DoS > Global
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
30.5.2 Port Settings
Use this screen to view the Port settings. Click Configuration > Security > DoS > Port to open this screen.
Table 156 Configuration > Security > DoS > Global
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Global
State Select the DoS security setting to be enabled or disabled.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 30 Configuration: Security
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
214
Figure 225 Configuration > Security > DoS > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
30.5.3 Port Edit
Use this screen to configure the Port settings.
Click Configuration > Security > DoS > Port > Edit to open this screen.
Figure 226 Configuration > Security > DoS > Port > Edit
Table 157 Configuration > Security > DoS > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Port Displays the port index value.
State Displays the port’s DoS feature as Enable or Disable.
Edit Select this check box to configure the properties of a port. Click the Edit button change the
properties of the port.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 30 Configuration: Security
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
215
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
30.5.4 DoS Attack Types
The following table describes the types of DoS attacks that the Switch can prevent when you enable the
DoS feature on the Switch and the ports.
Table 158 Configuration > Security > DoS > Port > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Port List Displays the port index value.
State Select Enable to activate the port’s DoS feature.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 159 DoS Attack Types
TYPE PACKET TYPE DESCRIPTION
DA_EQUAL_SA Layer 2 These attacks result from sending a specially crafted packet to a
machine where the source MAC address is the same as the
destination MAC address. The system attempts to reply to itself,
resulting in system lockup.
LAND Layer 3 IPv4/IPv6 These attacks result from sending a specially crafted packet to a
machine where the source host IPv4/IPv6 address is the same as
the destination host IPv4/IPv6 address. The system attempts to
reply to itself, resulting in system lockup.
UDP_BLAT / TCP_BLAT (Blat
Attack)
Layer 3 IPv4/IPv6 These attacks result from sending a specially crafted packet to a
machine where the source host UDP/TCP port is the same as the
destination host UDP/TCP port. The system attempts to reply to
itself, resulting in system lockup.
PoD (Ping of Death) Layer 3 IPv4/IPv6 Ping of Death uses a "ping" utility to create and send an IP packet
that exceeds the maximum 65,536 bytes of data allowed by the IP
specification. This may cause systems to crash, hang or reboot.
IPv6_FRAG_LEN_MIN Layer 3 IPv6 This attack uses IPv6 fragmented packets (excluding the last one)
whose payload length is less than 1240 bytes.
ICMP_FRAG_PKT Layer 3 IPv4/IPv6 This attack uses many small fragmented ICMP packets.
ICMPv4_PING_MAX /
ICMPv6_PING_MAX
Layer 3 IPv4/IPv6 This attack uses Ping packets whose length is larger than 512 bytes.
SMURF Layer 3 IPv4 This attack uses Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) echo
requests packets (pings) to cause network congestion or outages.
SYNchronization (SYN), ACKnowledgment (ACK) and FINish (FIN) packets are used to initiate, acknowledge and
conclude TCP/IP communication sessions. The following scans exploit weaknesses in the TCP/IP specification and
try to illicit a response from a host to identify ports for an attack:
TCP_HDR_LEN_MIN Layer 3 IPv4 TCP packets with header length less than 20 bytes.
SYN_SPORT_LESS_1024 Layer 3 IPv4/IPv6 TCP SYN packets with source port less than 1024.
NULL_SCAN (Scan Attack) Layer 3 IPv4/IPv6 TCP sequence number is zero and all control bits are zeros.
XMAS (Scan Attack) Layer 3 IPv4/IPv6 TCP sequence number is zero and the FIN, URG and PSH bits are
set.
SYN_FIN Layer 3 IPv4/IPv6 SYN and FIN bits are set in the TCP packet.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
216
CHAPTER 31
Configuration: AAA
31.1 Overview
This section provides information for AAA in Configuration.
Use the AAA screens to configure authentication, authorization and accounting settings on the Switch.
31.2 Auth Method
Authentication is the process of determining who a user is and validating access to the Switch. The
Switch can authenticate users who try to log in based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself.
The Switch can also use an external authentication server to authenticate a large number of users.
31.2.1 Auth Method Settings
Use this screen to view the Auth Method settings. Click Configuration > AAA > Auth Method to open this
screen.
Figure 227 Configuration > AAA > Auth Method
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
31.2.2 Auth Method Add or Edit
Use this screen to configure the Auth Method settings. Click Configuration > AAA > Auth Method > Add or
Edit to open this screen.
Table 160 Configuration > AAA > Auth Method
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Auth Method
Name Displays the authentication method name. The name can be between 1 and 31 ASCII
Alphanumeric Characters.
Method List Displays the list of authentication methods as being Local or Radius or TACACS+.
Action Click the Action button to change the configuration settings for a VLAN entry.
Add Click Add to create a new Auth Method entry.
Chapter 31 Configuration: AAA
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
217
Figure 228 Configuration > AAA > Auth Method > Add or Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
31.3 RADIUS Settings
31.3.1 RADIUS
Use this screen to configure the RADIUS settings. Click Configuration > AAA > RADIUS to open this screen.
Figure 229 Configuration > AAA > RADIUS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 161 Configuration > AAA > Auth Method > Add or Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Auth Method
Name Enter the authentication method name. The name can be between 1 and 31 ASCII
Alphanumeric Characters.
Method 1 Select the first authentication method as being Local, Radius, or TACACS+.
Method 2 Select the second authentication method as being Empty, Local, Radius, or TACACS+.
Method 3 Select the third authentication method as being Empty, Local, Radius, or TACACS+.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 162 Configuration > AAA > RADIUS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
RADIUS Servers
Server Displays the server names as an IP address or a domain name.
Auth Port Displays the authentication port numbers as a value between 0 and 65535.
Key Displays the authentication key.
Time out Displays the number of time outs for replies. The value can be between 1 and 30 seconds.
Retries Displays the number of retries. The value can be between 1 and 30.
Chapter 31 Configuration: AAA
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
218
31.3.2 RADIUS Add or Edit
Use this screen to configure the RADIUS settings. Click Configuration > AAA > RADIUS > Add or Edit to
open this screen.
Figure 230 Configuration > AAA > RADIUS > Add or Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Priority Displays the server priority as High or Low.
Usage Type Displays the server usage type as Login, 802.1X, or All.
Action
Edit Click to Edit modify the entry.
Delete Click Delete to delete the entry.
Add Click Add to create a new Server entry.
Table 162 Configuration > AAA > RADIUS (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 163 Configuration > AAA > RADIUS > Add or Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
RADIUS
Server Enter the server names as an IP address or a domain name.
Authentication
Port
Enter the authentication port numbers as a value between 0 and 65535.
Key String Enter the authentication key string: 0 – 63 ASCII Alphanumeric Characters.
Timeout for Reply Enter the number of time outs for replies. The value can be between 1 and 30 seconds.
Retries Enter the number of retries. The value can be between 1 and 30.
Server Priority Select the server priority as High or Low.
Usage Select the server usage type as Login, 802.1X, or All.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 31 Configuration: AAA
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
219
31.4 TACACS+ Settings
31.4.1 TACACS+
Use this screen to configure the TACACS+ settings. Click Configuration > AAA > TACACS+ to open this
screen.
Figure 231 Configuration > AAA > TACACS+
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
31.4.2 TACACS+ Add or Edit
Use this screen to configure the TACACS+ settings. Click Configuration > AAA > TACACS+ > Add or Edit to
open this screen.
Figure 232 Configuration > AAA > TACACS+ > Add or Edit
Table 164 Configuration > AAA > TACACS+
LABEL DESCRIPTION
TACACS+ Servers
Server Displays the server names as an IP address or a domain name.
Port Displays the port numbers as a value between 0 and 65535.
Key Displays the authentication key.
Timeout Displays the number of time outs for replies. The value can be between 1 and 30 seconds.
Priority Displays the priority as High or Low.
Action
Edit Click to Edit modify the entry.
Delete Click Delete to delete the entry.
Add Click Add to create a new Server entry.
Chapter 31 Configuration: AAA
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
220
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 165 Configuration > AAA > TACACS+ > Add or Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
TACACS+
Server Enter the server names as an IP address or a domain name.
Port Enter the port numbers as a value between 0 and 65535.
Key String Enter the authentication key string: 0 – 63 ASCII alphanumeric characters.
Timeout for Reply Enter the number of time outs for replies. The value can be between 1 and 30 seconds.
Server Priority Select the server priority as High or Low.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
221
CHAPTER 32
Configuration: Management
32.1 Overview
This section provides information for Management in Configuration.
Use the Management screens to configure settings on the Switch. The following sub-menus are
accessed from this section: Syslog, SNMP, Error Disable, HTTP/HTTPS, TELNET/SSH, Users, Remote Access
Control.
32.2 Syslog Settings
The syslog feature can stores logs in the Switch’s memory or sends logs to an external syslog server.
32.2.1 Global Settings
Use this screen to view and configure the Global settings. Click Configuration > Management > Syslog >
Global to open this screen.
Figure 233 Configuration > Management > Syslog > Global
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
32.2.2 Local Settings
Use this screen to view the Local settings. Click Configuration > Management > Syslog > Local to open
this screen.
Table 166 Configuration > Management > Syslog > Global
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Global
State Select Enable to turn on syslog (system logging) on the Switch. Otherwise, select Disable to turn
it off.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 32 Configuration: Management
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
222
Figure 234 Configuration > Management > Syslog > Local
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
32.2.3 Local Add or Edit
Use this screen to configure the Local settings. Click Configuration > Management > Syslog > Local >
Add or Edit to open this screen.
Figure 235 Configuration > Management > Syslog > Local > Add or Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 167 Configuration > Management > Syslog > Local
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Local
Target Displays the local storage target for logging messages.
It shows whether the logs are stored in the Switch’s run-time memory buffer or flash (permanent)
memory. If the logs are stored in the Switch’s memory buffer, the logs will be erased when the
Switch reboots.
Severity Displays the severity level of messages to be stored in the Switch’s memory.
The Switch stores the messages of that severity level or higher.
Action
Edit Click Edit to make changes to the entry.
Delete Click Delete to remove the entry.
Add Click Add to create a new Local entry.
Table 168 Configuration > Management > Syslog > Local > Add or Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Local
Target Select the local storage target for logging messages. The options are Buffered or Flash.
Severity Select the severity level of the messages that you want to save in the Switch’s memory. The
Switch stores the logging messages with the severity level equal to or higher than what you
selected. For example, if you select warning, all messages with the warning, error, crit, alert or
emerg severity level will be stored.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 32 Configuration: Management
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
223
32.2.4 Remote Settings
Use this screen to view the Remote settings. Click Configuration > Management > Syslog > Remote to
open this screen.
Figure 236 Configuration > Management > Syslog > Remote
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
32.2.5 Remote Add or Edit
Use this screen to add an external syslog server. Click Configuration > Management > Syslog > Remote >
Add or Edit to open this screen.
Figure 237 Configuration > Management > Syslog > Remote > Add or Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 169 Configuration > Management > Syslog > Remote
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Remote
Server Displays the external syslog server information which includes the server IP address and port
number.
Severity Displays the severity level of messages to be sent to the syslog server.
The Switch sends the messages of that severity level or higher.
Facility Displays the facility designation of the remote entry.
Action
Edit Click Edit to make changes to the entry.
Delete Click Delete to remove the entry.
Add Click Add to create a new Remote entry.
Table 170 Configuration > Management > Syslog > Remote > Add or Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Remote
Server Enter the IP address or domain name of the syslog server.
Server Port Enter port number of the syslog server.
Chapter 32 Configuration: Management
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
224
32.3 SNMP Settings
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application layer protocol used to manage and
monitor TCP/IP-based devices. SNMP is used to exchange management information between the
network management system (NMS) and a network element (NE). A manager station can manage and
monitor the Switch through the network through SNMP version 1 (SNMPv1), SNMP version 2c or SNMP
version 3.
32.3.1 Global Settings
Use this screen to view and configure the Global settings. Click Configuration > Management > SNMP >
Global to open this screen.
Figure 238 Configuration > Management > SNMP > Global
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
32.3.2 Community Settings
Use this screen to view the Community settings. Click Configuration > Management > SNMP >
Community to open this screen.
Severity Select the severity level of the messages that you want the Switch to send to this syslog server.
The Switch sends the logging messages with the severity level equal to or higher than what you
selected. For example, if you select warning, all messages with the warning, error, crit, alert or
emerg severity level will be sent.
Facility Select the log facility from the dropdown list. The log facility allows you to send logs to different
files in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 170 Configuration > Management > Syslog > Remote > Add or Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 171 Configuration > Management > SNMP > Global
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Global
State Select the global SNMP setting to be enabled or disabled.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 32 Configuration: Management
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
225
Figure 239 Configuration > Management > SNMP > Community
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
32.3.3 Community Add or Edit
Use this screen to configure the Community settings. Click Configuration > Management > SNMP >
Community > Add or Edit to open this screen.
Figure 240 Configuration > Management > SNMP > Community > Add or Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
32.3.4 Group Settings
Use this screen to view the Group settings. Click Configuration > Management > SNMP > Group to open
this screen.
Table 172 Configuration > Management > SNMP > Community
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Community
Community
Name
Displays a string identifying the community name that this entry should belong to. The allowed
string length is 1 to 20, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Access Right Displays the access mode for this entry. The possible values are Read-Only and Read-Write.
Action
Edit Click Edit to make changes to the entry.
Delete Click Delete to remove the entry.
Add Click Add to create a new SNMP Community entry.
Table 173 Configuration > Management > SNMP > Community > Add or Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Community
Community
Name
Enter a string identifying the community name that this entry should belong to. The allowed
string length is 1 to 20, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Access Right Select the access mode for this entry. The possible values are Read-Only and Read-Write.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 32 Configuration: Management
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
226
Figure 241 Configuration > Management > SNMP > Group
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
32.3.5 Group Add or Edit
Use this screen to configure the Group settings. Click Configuration > Management > SNMP > Group >
Add or Edit to open this screen.
Figure 242 Configuration > Management > SNMP > Group > Add or Edit
Table 174 Configuration > Management > SNMP > Group
LABEL DESCRIPTION
SNMPv3 Group
Group Name Displays a string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string
length is 1 to 30, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Security Model Displays the security model that this entry belongs to.
•v3: Reserved for SNMPv3.
Security Level Displays the security level that this entry belongs to. Possible security levels are:
•noauth: No authentication and no privacy.
•auth: Authentication and no privacy.
•Priv: Authentication and privacy.
Access Right Displays the access mode for this entry. The possible values are Read Only and Read-Write.
Action
Edit Click Edit to make changes to the entry.
Delete Click Delete to remove the entry.
Add Click Add to create a new SNMPv3 Group entry.
Chapter 32 Configuration: Management
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
227
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
32.3.6 User Settings
Use this screen to view the User settings. Click Configuration > Management > SNMP > User to open this
screen.
Figure 243 Configuration > Management > SNMP > User
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 175 Configuration > Management > SNMP > Group > Add or Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
SNMPv3 Group
Group Name Enter a string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string
length is 1 to 30, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Security Level Select the security level that this entry belongs to. Possible security levels are:
•noauth: No authentication and no privacy.
•auth: Authentication and no privacy.
•priv: Authentication and privacy.
Access Mode Select the access mode for this entry. The possible values are Read-Only and Read-Write.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 176 Configuration > Management > SNMP > User
LABEL DESCRIPTION
SNMP User
User Name Displays a string identifying the user name that this entry belongs to. The allowed string length is
1 to 30, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Group Displays a string identifying the group name that this entry belongs to. The allowed string length
is 1 to 30, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Privilege Mode Displays the privilege mode that this entry belongs to.
Authentication
Protocol
Displays the authentication protocol that this entry belongs to. Possible authentication protocols
are:
•None: No authentication protocol.
•MD5: An optional flag to indicate that this user uses MD5 authentication protocol.
•SHA: An optional flag to indicate that this user uses SHA authentication protocol.
The value of the security level cannot be modified if the entry already exists. That means you
must first ensure that the value is set correctly.
Encryption
Protocol
Displays the encryption protocol that this entry belongs to.
Access Right Displays the access mode for this entry. The possible values are Read-Only and Read-Write.
Action
Edit Click Edit to make changes to the entry.
Chapter 32 Configuration: Management
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
228
32.3.7 User Add or Edit
Use this screen to configure the User settings. Click Configuration > Management > SNMP > User > Add or
Edit to open this screen.
Figure 244 Configuration > Management > SNMP > User > Add or Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
32.3.8 Trap Settings
Use this screen to configure the Trap settings. Click Configuration > Management > SNMP > Trap to open
this screen.
Delete Click Delete to remove the entry.
Add Click Add to create a new SNMP user.
Table 176 Configuration > Management > SNMP > User (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 177 Configuration > Management > SNMP > User > Add or Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
SNMP User
User Name Enter a string identifying the user name that this entry belongs to. The allowed string length is 1 to
30, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Group Name Enter a string identifying the group name that this entry belongs to. The allowed string length is 1
to 30, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Auth Protocol Select the authentication protocol that this entry belongs to. Possible authentication protocols
are:
•MD5: An optional flag to indicate that this user uses MD5 authentication protocol.
•SHA: An optional flag to indicate that this user uses SHA authentication protocol.
The value of the security level cannot be modified if the entry already exists. That means you
must first ensure that the value is set correctly.
Auth Password Enter a string identifying the authentication password phrase. For MD5 authentication protocol,
the allowed string length is 8 to 32. For SHA authentication protocol, the allowed string length is
8 to 32. The allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Priv Password Enter a string identifying the privacy password phrase. The allowed string length is 8 to 64 and
the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 32 Configuration: Management
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
229
Figure 245 Configuration > Management > SNMP > Trap
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
32.3.9 Trap Destination
Use this screen to view the Trap Destination settings. Click Configuration > Management > SNMP > Trap
Destination to open this screen.
Figure 246 Configuration > Management > SNMP > Trap Destination
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 178 Configuration > Management > SNMP > Trap
LABEL DESCRIPTION
SNMP Trap
SNMP Authfailure
Trap State
Select the SNMP entity is permitted to generate authentication failure traps. Possible modes
are:
•Enabled: Enable SNMP trap authentication failure.
•Disabled: Disable SNMP trap authentication failure.
SNMP LinkupDown
Trap State
Select the SNMP trap link-up and link-down mode operation. Possible modes are:
•Enabled: Enable SNMP trap link-up and link-down mode operation.
•Disabled: Disable SNMP trap link-up and link-down mode operation.
SNMP Warm-Start
Trap State
Reboot using software or hardware button reboot.
SNMP Cold-Start Trap
State
Reboot though power off.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 179 Configuration > Management > SNMP > Trap Destination
LABEL DESCRIPTION
SNMP Trap Host
Server Displays a string identifying the server address that this entry belongs to.
Chapter 32 Configuration: Management
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
230
32.3.10 Trap Destination Add or Edit
Use this screen to configure the Trap Destination settings. Click Configuration > Management > SNMP >
Trap Destination > Add or Edit to open this screen.
Figure 247 Configuration > Management > SNMP > Trap Destination > Add or Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Version Indicates the SNMP trap supported version. Possible versions are:
•v1: Set SNMP trap supported version 1.
•v2c: Set SNMP trap supported version 2c.
•v3: Set SNMP trap supported version 3.
Community/User
Name
Displays the community or user name that this entry belongs to.
UDP Port Displays the trap use destination for the UDP port.
Action
Edit Click Edit to make changes to the entry.
Delete Click Delete to remove the entry.
Add Click Add to create a new SNMP Trap Host entry.
Table 179 Configuration > Management > SNMP > Trap Destination (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 180 Configuration > Management > SNMP > Trap Destination > Add or Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Trap Destination
Server Enter the IP address of the server or a string identifying the server address that this entry belongs
to.
Version Select the SNMP trap supported version. Possible versions are:
•v1: Set SNMP trap supported version 1.
•v2c: Set SNMP trap supported version 2c.
•v3: Set SNMP trap supported version 3.
Community
Name
Displays the community name that this entry belongs to.
User Name Displays the user name that this entry belongs to.
UDP Port Enter a UDP port for this entry.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 32 Configuration: Management
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
231
32.4 Error Disable
32.4.1 Error Disable Settings
Use this screen to configure the Error Disabled settings. Click Configuration > Management > Error
Disable to open this screen.
Figure 248 Configuration > Management > Error Disable
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
32.5 HTTP/HTTPS
32.5.1 HTTP Settings
Use this screen to configure the HTTP settings. Click Configuration > Management > HTTP/HTTPS > HTTP to
open this screen.
Table 181 Configuration > Management > Error Disable
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Error Disable
Recovery
Interval
Enter the recovery interval value.
Broadcast Flood Select an option to Enable or Disable the Broadcast Flood.
Unknown
Multicast Flood
Select an option to Enable or Disable the Unknown Multicast Flood.
Unicast Flood Select an option to Enable or Disable the Unicast Flood.
Port Security Select an option to Enable or Disable the Port Security.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 32 Configuration: Management
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
232
Figure 249 Configuration > Management > HTTP/HTTPS > HTTP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
32.5.2 HTTPS Settings
Use this screen to configure the HTTPS settings. Click Configuration > Management > HTTP/HTTPS > HTTPS
to open this screen.
Figure 250 Configuration > Management > HTTP/HTTPS > HTTPS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 182 Configuration > Management > HTTP/HTTPS > HTTP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
HTTP
State Select the HTTP mode operation.
Possible modes are:
•Enabled: Enable HTTP mode operation.
•Disabled: Disable HTTP mode operation.
Authentication
Method
Select the authentication method from the dropdown list.
Session Timeout Enter the session timeout value. The timeout can be between 0 and 86400 minutes.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 183 Configuration > Management > HTTP/HTTPS > HTTPS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
HTTPS
State Select the HTTPS mode operation.
Possible mode is:
•Enable: Enable HTTPS mode operation.
Authentication
Method
Select the authentication method from the dropdown list.
Chapter 32 Configuration: Management
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
233
32.6 TELNET/SSH
32.6.1 TELNET Settings
Use this screen to configure the TELNET settings. Click Configuration > Management > TELNET/SSH > TELNET
to open this screen.
Figure 251 Configuration > Management > TELNET/SSH > TELNET
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
32.6.2 SSH Settings
Use this screen to configure the SSH settings. Click Configuration > Management > TELNET/SSH > SSH to
open this screen.
Figure 252 Configuration > Management > TELNET/SSH > SSH
Session Timeout Enter the session timeout value. The timeout can be between 0 and 86400 minutes.
Re-Generate
Certificate
Click this to renew the HTTPS certificate that is verified by a third-party to create secure HTTPS
connections between your computer and the Switch. This allows you to securely access the
Switch using the Web Configurator.
Note: Re-generating the certificate will cause a network connection reset.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 183 Configuration > Management > HTTP/HTTPS > HTTPS (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 184 Configuration > Management > TELNET/SSH > TELNET
LABEL DESCRIPTION
TELNET
State You can allow the Switch for remote Telnet access. The administrator uses Telnet from a
computer on a remote network to access the Switch.
•Enable: allow remote Telnet access.
•Disable: do not allow remote Telnet access.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 32 Configuration: Management
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
234
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
32.7 Users Settings
32.7.1 Users
Use this screen to configure the Users settings. Click Configuration > Management > Users to open this
screen.
Figure 253 Configuration > Management > Users
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
32.7.2 Users Add or Edit
Use this screen to configure the Users settings. Click Configuration > Management > Users > Add or Edit
to open this screen.
Table 185 Configuration > Management > TELNET/SSH > SSH
LABEL DESCRIPTION
SSH
State You can allow a remote computer to access the Switch using SSH (Secure SHell protocol).
•Enable: allow SSH connection.
•Disable: do not allow SSH connection.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 186 Configuration > Management > Users
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Users
User A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is 1
to 32. The valid user name is a combination of letters, numbers and underscores.
Password Displays the password of the user. The allowed string length is 1 to 64.
Privilege Level Displays the privilege level of the user, range: admin and user.
Action
Edit Click Edit to make changes to the entry.
Delete Click Delete to remove the entry.
Add Click Add to create a new User entry.
Chapter 32 Configuration: Management
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
235
Figure 254 Configuration > Management > Users > Add or Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
32.8 Remote Access Control
32.8.1 Global Settings
Use this screen to configure the Global settings. Click Configuration > Management > Remote Access
Control > Global to open this screen.
Table 187 Configuration > Management > Users > Add or Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Users
User Enter a string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string
length is 1 to 32. The valid user name is a combination of letters, numbers and underscores.
Encryption Select how the password is shown in the Configuration > Management > Users screen and in the
configuration file saved in Maintenance > Configuration > Backup.
Note: Make sure to select Encrypted to avoid displaying passwords as plain text in the
Users screen and configuration file.
•Clear Text – The password is shown in plain text.
•Encrypted – The password is shown as asterisks (*).
Note: Be careful who can access configuration files with no password or clear text
passwords.
Password Enter a password using the keyboard characters ("a – z", "A – Z", "0 – 9", ~!@#$%^&*()_+`–
={}[]:;<>./\) for the user. The allowed string length is 1 to 64.
Password
Confirm
Enter the same password again to confirm.
Privilege Level Select the privilege level of the user range: Admin and User.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 32 Configuration: Management
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
236
Figure 255 Configuration > Management > Remote Access Control > Global
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
32.8.2 Profile Add or Edit
Use this screen to configure the Profile settings. Click Configuration > Management > Remote Access
Control > Global > Add or Edit to open this screen.
Table 188 Configuration > Management > Remote Access Control > Global
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Global
State Select the global remote access setting to be enabled or disabled.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Profile
No. Displays the priority level of the entry. The value can be between 1 and 16.
Action Displays the action value. The values are Permit or Deny.
Source IP Display the source IP value.
Source IP Mask Displays the source IP mask.
Port Display the port value.
Service Display the service used for remote access. The values are ALL, HTTP, HTTPS, or SNMP.
Action
Edit Click Edit to make changes to the entry.
Delete Click Delete to remove the entry.
Add Click Add to create a new profile entry.
Chapter 32 Configuration: Management
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
237
Figure 256 Configuration > Management > Remote Access Control > Global > Add or Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 189 Configuration > Management > Remote Access Control > Global > Add or Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Management Access List
No. Enter the priority level of the entry. The value can be between 1 and 16.
Action Select the action value. The values are Permit or Deny.
Port Select a value in Available and click the Add (>) icon to transfer to the Acting column.
Select a value in Acting and click the Remove (<) icon to transfer to the Available column.
Source Select the source IP value. The options are ALL or IPv4/Mask.
IPv4/Mask Select and enter the IPv4 address and subnet mask of a computer which will be allowed or
denied to access the Switch.
Service Select the service to use for remote access. The values are ALL, HTTP, HTTPS, or SNMP.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
238
CHAPTER 33
Maintenance
33.1 Firmware Upgrade
33.1.1 Overview
Firmware updates contain bug fixes and fixes for security vulnerabilities. It is recommended to keep the
Switch’s firmware up to date. You can upgrade the Switch’s firmware manually using a file downloaded
on your computer or through the online Web Configurator.
Note: Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware
may damage your device.
From the Maintenance screen, display the Upload screen as shown next. Use this screen to upgrade the
Switch’s firmware.
Figure 257 Maintenance > Firmware > Upload
The following table describes the labels under Upload.
33.1.2 Upgrade the firmware from a file on a server
Follow the steps below to upgrade the firmware from a TFTP server.
Table 190 Maintenance > Firmware > Upload
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Upload
Method Choose HTTP to use the Web Configurator for the firmware upload. Alternatively, choose TFTP to
download the firmware from a TFTP server.
Server IP To download from a TFTP server, enter the TFTP server IP address.
File Name Enter the name of the firmware file on the TFTP server.
Image Choose Backup to upload the firmware file as the backup image. Alternatively, choose Active
to upload the firmware file as the active image.
File Path Browse to the path on your computer to upload the firmware you want as the active image.
Chapter 33 Maintenance
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
239
1. In Method, choose TFTP.
2. In Server IP, enter the TFTP server IP address.
3. In File Name, enter the name of the firmware file on the TFTP server.
4. In Image, choose Backup to upload the firmware file as the backup image.
OR
Choose Active to upload the firmware file as the active image.
5. Click Apply to upgrade the chosen image.
OR
Click Cancel to discard the changes.
After the firmware upgrade process is complete, see the System Info screen to verify your current
firmware version number.
33.1.3 Upgrade the firmware from a file on your computer
Note: For manual upgrade, make sure you have downloaded (and unzipped) the correct
model firmware and version to your computer before uploading it to the device. The
file name should have a .bix extension.
Follow the steps below to upgrade the firmware from a file on your computer.
1. In Method, choose HTTP.
2. In Image, choose Active to upload the firmware file on the active partition image.
OR
Choose Backup to upload the firmware file on the backup partition image.
3. In File Path, click Browse to display the Choose File screen from which you can locate the firmware
file in the bix format on your computer.
4. Click Apply to upload the chosen file.
OR
Click Cancel to discard the changes.
After the firmware upgrade process is complete, see the System Info screen to verify your current
firmware version number.
33.2 Firmware Management
33.2.1 Overview
The Firmware Management screen provides instant access to the firmware versions installed on your
Switch. Active and backup firmware versions are saved as images on flash partitions. The backup image
is used when the active partition has problems during boot.
From the Maintenance screen, display the Firmware Management screen as shown next. Use this screen
to view image information and activate an image.
Chapter 33 Maintenance
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
240
Figure 258 Maintenance > Firmware > Management
The following table describes the labels shown under Images Information.
33.2.2 Select the Active Image
The available partition is shown under Image Select.
Follow the steps below to choose the active image, which will be the default partition during boot.
When you selected the active image and saved the changes, the other one will be the backup.
If you are facing problems with the active partition when booting, the Switch will use the backup one
and it’ll be loaded automatically.
1. In Active Image, choose the backup image according to the information displayed in Images Infor-
mation.
2. Click Apply to activate the backup image.
OR
Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 191 Maintenance > Firmware > Management
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Image Select
Active Image Select which firmware should load, click Apply and reboot the Switch to see changes.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Images Information
Flash Partition Displays the partition number.
Image Size Displays the size of the partition image in bytes.
Created Time Displays the date and time when the image was created in the Coordinated Universal Time
(UTC) format.
Chapter 33 Maintenance
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
241
33.3 Backup a Configuration File
33.3.1 Overview
You can save various “snapshots” of your device to the server or your computer and restore them at a
later date, if required.
Click Maintenance > Configuration > Backup to display the screen as shown next. Use this screen to
back up your current Switch configuration and log files to a server or as local files to your computer.
Figure 259 Maintenance > Configuration > Backup
The following table describes the labels under Backup.
Table 192 Maintenance > Configuration > Backup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Backup
Method Choose HTTP to use the Web Configurator to backup the configuration. Alternatively, choose
TFTP to upload the snapshot to a TFTP server.
Server IP To upload the backup to a TFTP server, enter the TFTP server IP address.
Content Choose the type of file for backup. You can back up configuration files (running, startup, or
backup) or log files (flash or buffer).
There are three different types of configuration files:
Backup configuration – this is saved in the Switch. If you make changes to the current
configuration, and there are problems, you can revert to the Backup configuration without
having to restore a new file.
Startup configuration – this is the configuration used when the Switch is booting up.
Running configuration – this is the configuration when the Switch is running.
There are two different types of log files:
Flash log: Select this to save logs in the Switch’s flash (permanent) memory.
Buffer log: Select this to save logs in the Switch’s memory buffer. If the logs are stored in the
Switch’s memory buffer, the logs will be erased when the Switch reboots.
Tech Support: Select this to upload the configuration/log files to the TFTP server. The log files
contain useful information such as CPU utilization, history, memory and Mbuf (Memory Buffer)
log, and crash reports for issue analysis by customer support should you have difficulty with your
Switch.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 33 Maintenance
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
242
33.3.2 Back up configuration or log files to a server
Follow the steps below to backup configuration or log files to a TFTP server.
1. In Method, choose TFTP.
2. In Server IP, enter the TFTP server IP address.
3. In Content, choose any one file type.
4. Click Apply to save a snapshot of your current configuration to the TFTP server.
OR
Click Cancel to discard the changes.
33.3.3 Back up configuration or log files to your computer
Follow the steps below to backup configuration or log files to your computer.
1. In Method, choose HTTP.
2. In Content, choose any one file type.
3. Click Apply to display the Save File screen from which you can save the configuration file in the cfg
format or the log file in the log format to your computer.
OR
Click Cancel to discard the changes.
33.4 Restore a Configuration File
33.4.1 Overview
You can restore a previously saved device configuration from the server or your computer.
Click Maintenance > Configuration > Restore to display the screen as shown next. Use this screen to
restore a previously saved configuration from a server or your computer.
Figure 260 Maintenance > Configuration > Restore
The following table describes the labels under Configuration Restore.
Table 193 Maintenance > Configuration > Restore
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Configuration Restore
Method Choose HTTP to use the Web Configurator for restoring the configuration file. Alternatively,
choose TFTP to download the snapshot from a TFTP server.
Server IP To download from a TFTP server, enter the TFTP server IP address.
Chapter 33 Maintenance
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
243
33.4.2 Restore the configuration from a file on a server
Follow the steps below to restore the configuration from a server.
1. In Method, choose TFTP.
2. In Server IP, enter the TFTP server IP address.
3. In File Name, enter the name of the configuration file on the TFTP server.
4. Click Apply to restore to the chosen file as the running configuration.
OR
Click Cancel to discard the changes.
33.4.3 Restore the configuration from a file on your computer
Follow the steps below to restore the configuration from a file on your computer.
1. In Method, choose HTTP.
2. In File Path, click Browse to display the Choose File screen from which you can locate the configura-
tion file in the cfg format on your computer.
3. Click Apply to restore to the chosen file as the running configuration.
OR
Click Cancel to discard the changes.
33.5 Manage Configuration Files
33.5.1 Overview
The Configuration Management screen provides instant access to the configuration files of your Switch.
You can overwrite the startup and backup configurations with the current running, startup, or backup
configuration file.
Click Maintenance > Configuration > Management to display the screen as shown next. Use this screen
to replace startup and backup configuration files.
File Name Enter the name of the configuration file on the TFTP server.
File Path Browse to the path on your computer to upload the configuration you want to restore.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Table 193 Maintenance > Configuration > Restore (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 33 Maintenance
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
244
Figure 261 Maintenance > Configuration > Management
Follow the steps to overwrite the startup or backup configuration file.
1. In Source File, select the file to be used as a reference.
2. In Destination File, select the file to be overwritten.
3. Click Apply to restore to overwrite the destination file with the source file.
OR
Click Cancel to discard the changes.
33.6 Reset to Factory Defaults
33.6.1 Overview
You can reset the Switch to it’s original settings.
Click Maintenance > Configuration > Factory Default to display the screen as shown next. Use this screen
to reset the Switch back to factory defaults.
Table 194 Maintenance > Configuration > Factory Default
33.6.2 Reset the Switch to Factory Defaults
Follow the steps below to reset the Switch back to factory defaults.
1. Click Restore.
2. Click OK to reset all Switch configurations to the factory defaults. Wait for the Switch to restart. This
takes up to 2 minutes.
OR
Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Note: If you want to access the Switch Web Configurator again, you may need to change
the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default Switch
IP address (192.168.1.1).
Chapter 33 Maintenance
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
245
33.7 Network Diagnostics
Use the network utilities to perform diagnostics.
33.7.1 Port Test
Click Maintenance > Diagnostics > Port Test > Cable Diag in the navigation panel to open this screen.
Use this screen to perform an internal loop-back test on an Ethernet port.
Note: The Switch measures the cable length by sending an electric signal through the cable
and reading the signal that is reflected back. To prevent possible interference from a
connected device, it is suggested that you disconnect the other end of the Ethernet
cable which is connected to the specified port.
Figure 262 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Port Test > Cable Diag
Follow the steps to perform the port test.
1. In Port Test, select the port number from the Port drop-down list.
2. Click Test to start the port test.
The test results are displayed in Test Results.
33.7.2 IPv4 Ping Test
Click Maintenance > Diagnostics > PING > IPv4 in the navigation panel to open this screen. Use this
screen to ping an IPv4 server.
Chapter 33 Maintenance
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
246
Figure 263 Maintenance > Diagnostics > PING > IPv4
The following table describes the labels under Ping Test.
Follow the steps to perform a ping test.
1. In IP Address, enter the IPv4 address.
2. In Count, enter the number of ping packets.
3. In Interval, enter the time interval in seconds.
4. In Size, enter the packet size in bytes
5. Click Apply to perform the ping test.
OR
Click Cancel to discard the changes.
The test results are displayed in Results.
Table 195 Maintenance > Diagnostics > PING > IPv4
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ping Test
IP Address Enter the address of the target host server.
Count Enter the number of ping packets to send. The range is 1 to 5 packets; the default count is 4.
Interval Enter the time in seconds between sending ping packets. The range is 1 to 5 seconds; the
default is 1 second.
Size Enter the individual packet size in bytes. The range is 8 to 5120 bytes; the default is 56 bytes.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 33 Maintenance
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
247
33.7.3 IPv6 Ping Test
Click Maintenance > Diagnostics > PING > IPv6 in the navigation panel to open this screen. Use this
screen to ping an IPv6 server.
Figure 264 Maintenance > Diagnostics > PING > IPv6
The following table describes the labels in IPv6 Ping Test.
Follow the steps to perform a ping test.
1. In IPv6 Address, enter the IPv6 address.
2. In Count, enter the number of ping packets.
3. In Interval, enter the time interval in seconds.
4. In Size, enter the packet size in bytes.
5. Click Apply to perform the ping test.
OR
Table 196 Maintenance > Diagnostics > PING > IPv6
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv6 Ping Test
IPv6 Address Enter the address of the target host server.
Count Enter the number of ping packets to send. The range is 1 to 5 packets; the default count is 4.
Interval Enter the time in seconds between sending ping packets. The range is 1 to 5 seconds; the
default is 1 second.
Size Enter the individual packet size in bytes. The range is 8 to 5120 bytes; the default is 56 bytes.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 33 Maintenance
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
248
Click Cancel to discard the changes.
The test results are displayed in Results.
33.7.4 Trace Route
Click Maintenance > Diagnostics > Trace > Trace Route in the navigation panel to open this screen. Use
this screen to print the route that IP packets take to a network host.
Figure 265 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Trace > Trace Route
The following table describes the labels in Trace Route.
Follow the steps to perform a trace route.
1. In IP Address, enter the IPv6 address.
2. In Hops, enter the number of hops.
3. Click Apply to perform the test.
OR
Click Cancel to discard the changes.
The test results are displayed in Result.
Table 197 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Trace > Trace Route
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Trace Route
IP Address Enter the address of the target host server.
Hops Enter the maximum number of time-to-live or hops used in outgoing probe packets. The range is
2 to 255 packets; the default is 30 hops.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Chapter 33 Maintenance
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
249
33.8 Reboot
33.8.1 Overview
You can reboot the Switch from the Web Configurator.
Click Maintenance > Reboot in the navigation panel to open this screen. Use this screen to restart the
Switch without physically turning the power off.
Figure 266 Maintenance > Reboot
33.8.2 Reboot the Switch
Follow the steps below to restart the Switch.
1. Click Reboot.
2. Click OK and then wait for the Switch to restart. This process takes up to 2 minutes and does not
affect the Switch’s configuration.
OR
Click Cancel to discard the changes.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
250
CHAPTER 34
Troubleshooting
This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are
divided into the following categories.
•Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
•Switch Access and Login
•Switch Configuration
34.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
The Switch does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on.
1Make sure the Switch is turned on (in DC models or if the DC power supply is connected in AC/DC
models).
2Make sure you are using the power adapter or cord included with the Switch.
3Make sure the power adapter or cord is connected to the Switch and plugged in to an appropriate
power source. Make sure the power source is turned on.
4Turn the Switch off and on (in DC models or if the DC power supply is connected in AC/DC models).
5Disconnect and re-connect the power adapter or cord to the Switch (in AC models or if the AC power
supply is connected in AC/DC models).
6If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
One of the LEDs does not behave as expected.
1Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 3.3 on page 41.
2Check the hardware connections. See Chapter 2 on page 25.
3Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables.
4Turn the Switch off and on (in DC models or if the DC power supply is connected in AC/DC models).
5Disconnect and re-connect the power adapter or cord to the Switch (in AC models or if the AC power
Chapter 34 Troubleshooting
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
251
supply is connected in AC/DC models).
6If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
34.2 Switch Access and Login
I forgot the IP address for the Switch.
1The default in-band IP address is 192.168.1.1 or http://DHCP-assigned IP (when connecting to a DHCP
server).
2If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 3.4 on page 43 or
Section 33.6 on page 244.
I forgot the user name and/or password.
1The default user name is admin and the default password is 1234.
2If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 3.4 on page 43 or
Section 33.6 on page 244.
I cannot see or access the Login screen in the Web Configurator.
1Make sure you are using the correct IP address.
• The default in-band IP address is 192.168.1.1.
• If you changed the IP address, use the new IP address.
• If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I
forgot the IP address for the Switch.
2Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See Chapter 2
on page 25.
3Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java
enabled.
4Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the Switch. (If you know that there are routers
between your computer and the Switch, skip this step.)
5Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the Switch with the default IP address. See
Section 3.4 on page 43 or Section 33.6 on page 244.
Chapter 34 Troubleshooting
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
252
6If the problem continues, contact the vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions.
Advanced Suggestions
• Try to access the Switch using another service, such as HTTPS. If you can access the Switch, check the
remote management settings to find out why the Switch does not respond to HTTP.
I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the Switch.
1Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly. The default user name is admin,
and the default password is 1234. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
2Check that you have enabled logins for HTTP. If you have configured a secured client IP address, your
computer’s IP address must match it. Refer to the chapter on access control for details.
3Disconnect and re-connect the cord to the Switch.
4If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 3.4 on page 43 or
Section 33.6 on page 244.
Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
In order to use the Web Configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device.
• JavaScripts (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
34.3 Switch Configuration
I lost my configuration settings after I restart the Switch.
Make sure you save your configuration into the Switch’s non-
volatile memory each time you make changes. Click Save at
the top right corner of the Web Configurator to save the
configuration permanently. See also Section 5.3.1 on page 52 for more information about how to save
your configuration.
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
253
APPENDIX A
Customer Support
In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual, you should contact your vendor. If
you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a Zyxel office for the region in which you bought the
device.
For Zyxel Communication offices, see https://service-provider.zyxel.com/global/en/contact-us for the
latest information.
For Zyxel Network offices, see https://www.zyxel.com/index.shtml for the latest information.
Please have the following information ready when you contact an office.
Required Information
• Product model and serial number.
• Warranty Information.
• Date that you received your device.
• Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it.
Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide)
Taiwan
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com
Asia
China
• Zyxel Communications (Shanghai) Corp.
Zyxel Communications (Beijing) Corp.
Zyxel Communications (Tianjin) Corp.
• https://www.zyxel.com/cn/zh/
India
•Zyxel Technology India Pvt Ltd.
• https://www.zyxel.com/in/en/
Kazakhstan
•Zyxel Kazakhstan
• https://www.zyxel.kz
Appendix A Customer Support
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
254
Korea
• Zyxel Korea Corp.
• http://www.zyxel.kr
Malaysia
• Zyxel Malaysia Sdn Bhd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.my
Pakistan
• Zyxel Pakistan (Pvt.) Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.pk
Philippines
• Zyxel Philippines
• http://www.zyxel.com.ph
Singapore
• Zyxel Singapore Pte Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.sg
Taiwan
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/tw/zh/
Thailand
• Zyxel Thailand Co., Ltd.
• https://www.zyxel.com/th/th/
Vietnam
• Zyxel Communications Corporation-Vietnam Office
• https://www.zyxel.com/vn/vi
Europe
Belarus
•Zyxel BY
• https://www.zyxel.by
Bulgaria
•Zyxel България
• https://www.zyxel.com/bg/bg/
Appendix A Customer Support
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
255
Czech Republic
• Zyxel Communications Czech s.r.o
• https://www.zyxel.com/cz/cs/
Denmark
• Zyxel Communications A/S
• https://www.zyxel.com/dk/da/
Finland
• Zyxel Communications
• https://www.zyxel.com/fi/fi/
France
•Zyxel France
• https://www.zyxel.fr
Germany
•Zyxel Deutschland GmbH
• https://www.zyxel.com/de/de/
Hungary
• Zyxel Hungary & SEE
• https://www.zyxel.com/hu/hu/
Italy
• Zyxel Communications Italy
• https://www.zyxel.com/it/it/
Netherlands
• Zyxel Benelux
• https://www.zyxel.com/nl/nl/
Norway
• Zyxel Communications
• https://www.zyxel.com/no/no/
Poland
• Zyxel Communications Poland
• https://www.zyxel.com/pl/pl/
Romania
• Zyxel Romania
Appendix A Customer Support
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
256
• https://www.zyxel.com/ro/ro
Russia
• Zyxel Russia
• https://www.zyxel.com/ru/ru/
Slovakia
• Zyxel Communications Czech s.r.o. organizacna zlozka
• https://www.zyxel.com/sk/sk/
Spain
• Zyxel Communications ES Ltd.
• https://www.zyxel.com/es/es/
Sweden
• Zyxel Communications
• https://www.zyxel.com/se/sv/
Switzerland
•Studerus AG
• https://www.zyxel.ch/de
• https://www.zyxel.ch/fr
Turkey
• Zyxel Turkey A.S.
• https://www.zyxel.com/tr/tr/
UK
• Zyxel Communications UK Ltd.
• https://www.zyxel.com/uk/en/
Ukraine
•Zyxel Ukraine
• http://www.ua.zyxel.com
South America
Argentina
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/
Appendix A Customer Support
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
257
Brazil
• Zyxel Communications Brasil Ltda.
• https://www.zyxel.com/br/pt/
Colombia
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/
Ecuador
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/
South America
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/
Middle East
Israel
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• http://il.zyxel.com/
North America
USA
• Zyxel Communications, Inc. – North America Headquarters
• https://www.zyxel.com/us/en/
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
258
APPENDIX B
Legal Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2022 by Zyxel and/or its affiliates.
The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any
language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or
otherwise, without the prior written permission of Zyxel and/or its affiliates.
Published by Zyxel and/or its affiliate. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
Zyxel does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any
license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. Zyxel further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein
without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.
Regulatory Notice and Statement (Class A)
Model List: GS1900-8 (Revision B1), GS1900-8HP (Revision A1, B2), GS1900-10HP (Revision B1), GS1900-16
(Revision B1), GS1900-24, GS1900-24E (Revision B1), GS1900-24EP, GS1900-24HP/GS1900-24HPv2, GS1900-
48, GS1900-48HP/GS1900-48HPv2
United States of America
The following information applies if you use the product within USA area.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) EMC Statement
• This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to
cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Canada
The following information applies if you use the product within Canada area
Industry Canada ICES statement
CAN ICES-3 (A)/NMB-3(A)
European Union and United Kingdom
The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union and United Kingdom.
EMC statement
WARNING: This equipment is compliant with Class A of EN55032. In a residential environment this equipment may cause radio interference.
Appendix B Legal Information
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
259
List of National Codes
Safety Warnings
• Do not use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• Do not expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
• Do not store things on the device.
• Do not obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device. For example, do not place the device in an
enclosed space such as a box or on a very soft surface such as a bed or sofa.
• Do not install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
• Do not open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. Only qualified
service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.
• Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
• Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
• Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
• Do not remove the plug and connect it to a power outlet by itself; always attach the plug to the power adaptor first before connecting it to
a power outlet.
• Do not allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor
or cord.
• Please use the provided or designated connection cables/power cables/ adaptors. Connect it to the right supply voltage (for example,
110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, it might cause electrocution. Remove it from the
device and the power source, repairing the power adapter or cord is prohibited. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.
• Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Caution: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type, dispose of used batteries according to the instruction. Dispose them at
the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic device. For detailed information about recycling of this product,
please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the store where you purchased the product.
• Use ONLY power wires of the appropriate wire gauge for your device. Connect it to a power supply of the correct voltage.
• Fuse Warning! Replace a fuse only with a fuse of the same type and rating.
• The POE (Power over Ethernet) devices that supply or receive power and their connected Ethernet cables must all be completely indoors.
• The following warning statements apply, where the disconnect device is not incorporated in the device or where the plug on the power
supply cord is intended to serve as the disconnect device,
– For permanently connected devices, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated external to the device;
– For pluggable devices, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the device and shall be easily accessible.
• This equipment must be grounded by qualified service personnel. Never defeat the ground conductor or operate the equipment in the
absence of a suitably installed ground conductor. Contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or an electrician if you are
uncertain that suitable grounding is available.
• If your device has an earthing screw (frame ground), connect the screw to a ground terminal using an appropriate AWG ground wire. Do this
before you make other connections.
• If your device has no earthing screw, but has a 3-prong power plug, make sure to connect the plug to a 3-hole earthed socket.
• When connecting or disconnecting power to hot-pluggable power supplies, if offered with your system, observe the following guidelines:
– Install the power supply before connecting the power cable to the power supply.
– Unplug the power cable before removing the power supply.
– If the system has multiple sources of power, disconnect power from the system by unplugging all power cables from the power supply.
• CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT (for products with mini-GBIC slots or laser products, such as fiber-optic transceiver and GPON products).
• PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11. (for products with mini-GBIC slots or laser products, such as fiber-optic transceiver and
GPON products)
COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE
Austria AT Liechtenstein LI
Belgium BE Lithuania LT
Bulgaria BG Luxembourg LU
Croatia HR Malta MT
Cyprus CY Netherlands NL
Czech Republic CZ Norway NO
Denmark DK Poland PL
Estonia EE Portugal PT
Finland FI Romania RO
France FR Serbia RS
Germany DE Slovakia SK
Greece GR Slovenia SI
Hungary HU Spain ES
Iceland IS Sweden SE
Ireland IE Switzerland CH
Italy IT Turkey TR
Latvia LV United Kingdom GB
Appendix B Legal Information
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
260
• APPAREIL À LASER DE CLASS 1 (for products with mini-GBIC slots or laser products, such as fiber-optic transceiver and GPON products).
• PRODUIT CONFORME SELON 21 CFR 1040.10 ET 1040.11. (for products with mini-GBIC slots or laser products, such as fiber-optic transceiver and
GPON products)
Environment Statement
Disposal and Recycling Information
The symbol below means that according to local regulations your product and/or its battery shall be disposed of separately from domestic
waste. If this product is end of life, take it to a recycling station designated by local authorities. At the time of disposal, the separate collection of
your product and/or its battery will help save natural resources and ensure that the environment is sustainable development.
Die folgende Symbol bedeutet, dass Ihr Produkt und/oder seine Batterie gemäß den örtlichen Bestimmungen getrennt vom Hausmüll entsorgt
werden muss. Wenden Sie sich an eine Recyclingstation, wenn dieses Produkt das Ende seiner Lebensdauer erreicht hat. Zum Zeitpunkt der
Entsorgung wird die getrennte Sammlung von Produkt und/oder seiner Batterie dazu beitragen, natürliche Ressourcen zu sparen und die Umwelt
und die menschliche Gesundheit zu schützen.
El símbolo de abajo indica que según las regulaciones locales, su producto y/o su batería deberán depositarse como basura separada de la
doméstica. Cuando este producto alcance el final de su vida útil, llévelo a un punto limpio. Cuando llegue el momento de desechar el
producto, la recogida por separado éste y/o su batería ayudará a salvar los recursos naturales y a proteger la salud humana y
medioambiental.
Le symbole ci-dessous signifie que selon les réglementations locales votre produit et/ou sa batterie doivent être éliminés séparément des ordures
ménagères. Lorsque ce produit atteint sa fin de vie, amenez-le à un centre de recyclage. Au moment de la mise au rebut, la collecte séparée
de votre produit et/ou de sa batterie aidera à économiser les ressources naturelles et protéger l'environnement et la santé humaine.
Il simbolo sotto significa che secondo i regolamenti locali il vostro prodotto e/o batteria deve essere smaltito separatamente dai rifiuti domestici.
Quando questo prodotto raggiunge la fine della vita di servizio portarlo a una stazione di riciclaggio. Al momento dello smaltimento, la raccolta
separata del vostro prodotto e/o della sua batteria aiuta a risparmiare risorse naturali e a proteggere l'ambiente e la salute umana.
Symbolen innebär att enligt lokal lagstiftning ska produkten och/eller dess batteri kastas separat från hushållsavfallet. När den här produkten når
slutet av sin livslängd ska du ta den till en återvinningsstation. Vid tiden för kasseringen bidrar du till en bättre miljö och mänsklig hälsa genom att
göra dig av med den på ett återvinningsställe.
台灣
警告使用者：
• 這是甲類的資訊產品，在居住的環境中使用時，可能會造成射頻干擾，在這種情況下，使用者會被要求採取某些適當的對策。」
安全警告 – 為了您的安全，請先閱讀以下警告及指示 :
• 請勿將此產品接近水、火焰或放置在高溫的環境。
• 避免設備接觸
– 任何液體 - 切勿讓設備接觸水、雨水、高濕度、污水腐蝕性的液體或其他水份。
– 灰塵及污物 - 切勿接觸灰塵、污物、沙土、食物或其他不合適的材料。
• 雷雨天氣時，不要安裝，使用或維修此設備。有遭受電擊的風險。
• 切勿重摔或撞擊設備，並勿使用不正確的電源變壓器。
• 若接上不正確的電源變壓器會有爆炸的風險。
• 請勿隨意更換產品內的電池。
• 如果更換不正確之電池型式，會有爆炸的風險，請依製造商說明書處理使用過之電池。
• 請將廢電池丟棄在適當的電器或電子設備回收處。
• 請勿將設備解體。
• 請勿阻礙設備的散熱孔，空氣對流不足將會造成設備損害。
• 請插在正確的電壓供給插座 ( 如 : 北美 / 台灣電壓 110V AC，歐洲是 230V AC)。
• 假若電源變壓器或電源變壓器的纜線損壞，請從插座拔除，若您還繼續插電使用，會有觸電死亡的風險。
• 請勿試圖修理電源變壓器或電源變壓器的纜線，若有毀損，請直接聯絡您購買的店家，購買⼀個新的電源變壓器。
Appendix B Legal Information
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
261
• 請勿將此設備安裝於室外，此設備僅適合放置於室內。
• 請勿隨⼀般垃圾丟棄。
• 請參閱產品背貼上的設備額定功率。
• 請參考產品型錄或是彩盒上的作業溫度。
• 設備必須接地，接地導線不允許被破壞或沒有適當安裝接地導線，如果不確定接地方式是否符合要求可聯繫相應的電氣檢驗機構檢驗。
• 如果您提供的系統中有提供熱插拔電源，連接或斷開電源請遵循以下指導原則
–先連接電源線至設備連，再連接電源。
–先斷開電源再拔除連接至設備的電源線。
– 如果系統有多個電源，需拔除所有連接至電源的電源線再關閉設備電源。
• 產品沒有斷電裝置或者採用電源線的插頭視為斷電裝置的⼀部分，以下警語將適用 :
– 對永久連接之設備， 在設備外部須安裝可觸及之斷電裝置；
– 對插接式之設備， 插座必須接近安裝之地點而且是易於觸及的。
Regulatory Notice and Statement (Class B)
Model List: GS1900-8, GS1900-8HP (Revision B1), GS1900-10HP, GS1900-16, GS1900-24E
UNITED STATES of AMERICA
The following information applies if you use the product within USA area.
FCC EMC Statement
• The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• This product has been tested and complies with the specifications for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used according to the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this device does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which is found by turning the device off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
• Increase the separation between the devices
• Connect the equipment to an outlet other than the receiver’s
• Consult a dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for assistance
CANADA
The following information applies if you use the product within Canada area
Industry Canada ICES statement
CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B)
EUROPEAN UNION and UNITED KINGDOM
The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union and United Kingdom.
Appendix B Legal Information
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
262
List of national codes
Safety Warnings
• Do not use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• Do not expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
• Do not store things on the device.
• Do not obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device. For example, do not place the device in an
enclosed space such as a box or on a very soft surface such as a bed or sofa.
• Do not install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
• Do not open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified
service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.
• Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
• Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
• Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
• Do not remove the plug and connect it to a power outlet by itself; always attach the plug to the power adaptor first before connecting it to
a power outlet.
• Do not allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor
or cord.
• Please use the provided or designated connection cables/power cables/ adaptors. Connect it to the right supply voltage (for example,
110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, it might cause electrocution. Remove it from the
device and the power source, repairing the power adapter or cord is prohibited. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.
• Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type, dispose of used batteries according to the instruction. Dispose them at
the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic devices. For detailed information about recycling of this
product, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the store where you purchased the product.
• The following warning statements apply, where the disconnect device is not incorporated in the device or where the plug on the power
supply cord is intended to serve as the disconnect device,
– For permanently connected devices, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated external to the device;
– For pluggable devices, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the device and shall be easily accessible.
• CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT (for products with mini-GBIC slots or laser products, such as fiber-optic transceiver and GPON products).
• PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11. (for products with mini-GBIC slots or laser products, such as fiber-optic transceiver and
GPON products)
• APPAREIL À LASER DE CLASS 1 (for products with mini-GBIC slots or laser products, such as fiber-optic transceiver and GPON products).
• PRODUIT CONFORME SELON 21 CFR 1040.10 ET 1040.11. (for products with mini-GBIC slots or laser products, such as fiber-optic transceiver and
GPON products)
Environment Statement
ErP (Energy-related Products)
Zyxel products put on the EU and United Kingdom market in compliance with the requirement of the European Parliament and the Council
published Directive 2009/125/EC and UK regulation establishing a framework for the setting of ecodesign requirements for energy-related
products (recast), so called as "ErP Directive (Energy-related Products directive) as well as ecodesign requirement laid down in applicable
implementing measures, power consumption has satisfied regulation requirements which are:
• Network standby power consumption < 8W, and/or
COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE
Austria AT Liechtenstein LI
Belgium BE Lithuania LT
Bulgaria BG Luxembourg LU
Croatia HR Malta MT
Cyprus CY Netherlands NL
Czech Republic CZ Norway NO
Denmark DK Poland PL
Estonia EE Portugal PT
Finland FI Romania RO
France FR Serbia RS
Germany DE Slovakia SK
Greece GR Slovenia SI
Hungary HU Spain ES
Iceland IS Switzerland CH
Ireland IE Sweden SE
Italy IT Turkey TR
Latvia LV United Kingdom GB
Appendix B Legal Information
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
263
• Off mode power consumption < 0.5W, and/or
• Standby mode power consumption < 0.5W.
Disposal and Recycling Information
The symbol below means that according to local regulations your product and/or its battery shall be disposed of separately from domestic
waste. If this product is end of life, take it to a recycling station designated by local authorities. At the time of disposal, the separate collection of
your product and/or its battery will help save natural resources and ensure that the environment is sustainable development.
Die folgende Symbol bedeutet, dass Ihr Produkt und/oder seine Batterie gemäß den örtlichen Bestimmungen getrennt vom Hausmüll entsorgt
werden muss. Wenden Sie sich an eine Recyclingstation, wenn dieses Produkt das Ende seiner Lebensdauer erreicht hat. Zum Zeitpunkt der
Entsorgung wird die getrennte Sammlung von Produkt und/oder seiner Batterie dazu beitragen, natürliche Ressourcen zu sparen und die Umwelt
und die menschliche Gesundheit zu schützen.
El símbolo de abajo indica que según las regulaciones locales, su producto y/o su batería deberán depositarse como basura separada de la
doméstica. Cuando este producto alcance el final de su vida útil, llévelo a un punto limpio. Cuando llegue el momento de desechar el
producto, la recogida por separado éste y/o su batería ayudará a salvar los recursos naturales y a proteger la salud humana y
medioambiental.
Le symbole ci-dessous signifie que selon les réglementations locales votre produit et/ou sa batterie doivent être éliminés séparément des ordures
ménagères. Lorsque ce produit atteint sa fin de vie, amenez-le à un centre de recyclage. Au moment de la mise au rebut, la collecte séparée
de votre produit et/ou de sa batterie aidera à économiser les ressources naturelles et protéger l'environnement et la santé humaine.
Il simbolo sotto significa che secondo i regolamenti locali il vostro prodotto e/o batteria deve essere smaltito separatamente dai rifiuti domestici.
Quando questo prodotto raggiunge la fine della vita di servizio portarlo a una stazione di riciclaggio. Al momento dello smaltimento, la raccolta
separata del vostro prodotto e/o della sua batteria aiuta a risparmiare risorse naturali e a proteggere l'ambiente e la salute umana.
Symbolen innebär att enligt lokal lagstiftning ska produkten och/eller dess batteri kastas separat från hushållsavfallet. När den här produkten når
slutet av sin livslängd ska du ta den till en återvinningsstation. Vid tiden för kasseringen bidrar du till en bättre miljö och mänsklig hälsa genom att
göra dig av med den på ett återvinningsställe.
台灣
安全警告 – 為了您的安全，請先閱讀以下警告及指示 :
• 請勿將此產品接近水、火焰或放置在高溫的環境。
• 避免設備接觸任何液體 – 切勿讓設備接觸水、雨水、高濕度、污水腐蝕性的液體或其他水份。
• 灰塵及污物 – 切勿接觸灰塵、污物、沙土、食物或其他不合適的材料。
• 雷雨天氣時，不要安裝，使用或維修此設備。有遭受電擊的風險。
• 切勿重摔或撞擊設備，並勿使用不正確的電源變壓器。
• 若接上不正確的電源變壓器會有爆炸的風險。
• 請勿隨意更換產品內的電池。
• 如果更換不正確之電池型式，會有爆炸的風險，請依製造商說明書處理使用過之電池。
• 請將廢電池丟棄在適當的電器或電子設備回收處。
• 請勿將設備解體。
• 請勿阻礙設備的散熱孔，空氣對流不足將會造成設備損害。
• 請插在正確的電壓供給插座 ( 如 : 北美 / 台灣電壓 110 V AC，歐洲是 230 V AC)。
• 假若電源變壓器或電源變壓器的纜線損壞，請從插座拔除，若您還繼續插電使用，會有觸電死亡的風險。
• 請勿試圖修理電源變壓器或電源變壓器的纜線，若有毀損，請直接聯絡您購買的店家，購買⼀個新的電源變壓器。
• 請勿將此設備安裝於室外，此設備僅適合放置於室內。
• 請勿隨⼀般垃圾丟棄。
• 請參閱產品背貼上的設備額定功率。
• 請參考產品型錄或是彩盒上的作業溫度。
• 產品沒有斷電裝置或者採用電源線的插頭視為斷電裝置的⼀部分，以下警語將適用 :
– 對永久連接之設備， 在設備外部須安裝可觸及之斷電裝置；
– 對插接式之設備， 插座必須接近安裝之地點而且是易於觸及的。
About the Symbols
Various symbols are used in this product to ensure correct usage, to prevent danger to the user and others, and to prevent property damage.
The meaning of these symbols are described below. It is important that you read these descriptions thoroughly and fully understand the
contents.
Appendix B Legal Information
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
264
Explanation of the Symbols
Viewing Certifications
Go to http://www.zyxel.com to view this product’s documentation and certifications.
Zyxel Limited Warranty
Zyxel warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific period (the
Warranty Period) from the date of purchase. The Warranty Period varies by region. Check with your vendor and/or the authorized Zyxel local
distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product
have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, Zyxel will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or
components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to
proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value,
and will be solely at the discretion of Zyxel. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by
an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.
Note
Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties,
express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. Zyxel shall in no event be held
liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.
To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the
device at http://www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php.
Registration
Register your product on-line at www.zyxel.com to receive email notices of firmware upgrades and related information.
Trademarks
The trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners.
Open Source Licenses
This product may contain in part some free software distributed under GPL license terms and/or GPL like licenses. To request the source code
covered under these licenses, please go to: https://www.zyxel.com/form/gpl_oss_software_notice.shtml
SYMBOL EXPLANATION
Alternating current (AC):
AC is an electric current in which the flow of electric charge periodically reverses direction.
Direct current (DC):
DC if the unidirectional flow or movement of electric charge carriers.
Earth; ground:
A wiring terminal intended for connection of a Protective Earthing Conductor.
Class II equipment:
The method of protection against electric shock in the case of class II equipment is either double insulation or
reinforced insulation.
Index
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
265
Index
Numbers
10/100/1000 Mbps gigabit Ethernet 33
1000Base-T Ethernet port 33
19-inch rack 28
802.1x port authentication 89
A
AAA (authentication, authorization and
accounting) 216
AC power ground 39
access 50
ACKnowledgment (ACK) 215
Add Filtering MAC screen 151
Add OUI screen 147
administrator password 51
air circulation
desktop installation 26
for cooling 25
altitude 193
application
backbone 21
bridging 21
fiber-optic uplink 21
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN 22
PoE 20
Auth Method screen 216
Authenticated Hosts screen 116
authentication 216
authentication failure traps 229
authentication method 232
select 232
authentication password 228
authentication protocol 228
display 227
authorized technician
install the Switch 25
auto configuration 75, 121
auto-crossover (auto-MDI/MDI-X) port 33
auto-negotiating port 33
B
back up configuration files
to a server 242
to your computer 242
back up log files
to a server 242
to your computer 242
backbone 21
backup configuration file
overwrite 244
Backup screen 241
bandwidth contention
alleviate 21
Bandwidth Control screen 83
Bandwidth Utilization screen 80
BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) 180
bracket
for mounting 28
bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) 178
broadcast 100, 169
broadcast packet 136
broadcast storm control 135
bug fixes 238
button
PoE mode 36
RESET 43
RESTORE 43
C
Cable Diag screen 245
cable length
measure 245
certifications 262
Index
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
266
viewing 264
CIST Instance screen 104, 180
CIST Port screen 105, 181
Class of Service (CoS) 201
clearance
for ventilation hole 25
Switch installation 25
Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) 104
Community screen 224
comparison table
hardware version 18
Switch 19
configuration file
back up 241
manage 243
restore 242
Configuration menu
Web Configurator 55
Configuration Restore screen 242
connection speed
SFP transceiver 34
contact information 253
cookies 50
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) format 240
copyright 258
CoS Mapping screen 201
country code 193
crossover Ethernet cable 33
current date/time 62
customer support 253
D
Daylight Saving Time 122
Denial of Service (DoS) attack 213
destination lookup failure (DLF) 135
DHCP setting 121
DHCP state 74
DHCPv6 client 23, 121
diagnostics
perform 245
disclaimer 258
DNS (Domain Name System) 63, 65, 75, 121
DNS server 75
DoS attack 213
types 215
DoS protection 213
DSCP Mapping screen 202
duplex mode 33, 78, 126, 127
dust plug
transceiver 34
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) 74
dynamic link aggregation 152
Dynamic MAC Age screen 151
dynamic router port 103
E
earth resistance
specification 39
earthing terminal
building 39
EEE settings
VLAN port 144
Egress Global Burst screen 134
egress port 83, 142
EIA rack 28
EIA standard size 28
electrical inspection authority 40
electrical regulation 39
electrician 40
electrocution
protect from 38
electrostatic discharge (ESD) 34
encryption protocol
display 227
endpoint 195
Energy-Efficient Ethernet (EEE) setting 127
Error Disable screen 118, 231
ESD preventive wrist strap 34
ESD protection 39
Ethernet port 33
default setting 33
loop-back test 245
Index
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
267
F
factory-default configuration file
reload 43
FCC interference statement 258
fiber-optic cable 33
connecting 35
removal 35
File Management screen 243
Filtering MAC screen 150
FINish (FIN) packet 215
Firefox 50
firmware
current version 62
firmware update 238
firmware upgrade
steps 238
flash (permanent) memory 222
flash partition number 240
flow control
state 126
forbidden router port 103, 172, 173
frame broadcast domain
share 23
front panel 31
FTP 24
full duplex 33
G
gap
screw insertion 27
gateway 75
Getting Start icon 61
Getting Start screen 61
Getting Started screen 51
gigabit Ethernet 22
Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) 17
Global screen 143, 235
voice VLAN 145
Google Chrome 50
ground cable
specification 39
ground wire 38
grounding
safety measure 38
grounding bar 39
grounding electrode 39
grounding screw 38
grounding terminal 39
guest VLAN 89
guest VLAN example 143
guest voice media 195
H
half duplex 33
hardware installation 25
hardware overview 31
host server
IPv4 address 246
IPv6 address 247
HTML5 support 50
HTTP 23
HTTP mode 232
HTTP screen 231
HTTPS certificate 233
HTTPS screen 232
I
ICMPv6 23
IEEE 802.1D
Spanning Tree Protocol 177
IEEE 802.1D priority level 195
IEEE 802.1Q-2003 194, 195
IEEE 802.1s
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol 177
IEEE 802.1w
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol 177
IEEE 802.3af PoE 81, 129
IEEE 802.3at High PoE 81, 129
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) 100,
169
IGMP Edit screen 171
Index
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
268
IGMP Group screen 102
IGMP Port Throttling screen 174, 176
IGMP Profile screen 173, 174
IGMP Querier version 171
IGMP Router Edit screen 172
IGMP Router screen 103
IGMP screen 100
IGMP state 171
IGMP Statistics screen 101
IGMP VLAN screen 170
Image Select screen 240
ingress filter 88
ingress filtering 141
ingress port 83, 195
installation
air circulation 25
desktop 26
freestanding 26
precautions 29
installation requirement
rack mounting 28
wall mounting 27
installation scenarios 25
Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) 215
Internet Explorer 50
Internet Protocol version 6, see IPv6
introduction 17
IP address 121
default 74, 120
TFTP server 238
IP Precedence Mapping screen 203
IP Telephony handset 195
IPv4 address
host server 246
IPv4 Address screen 120
IPv4 information 74
IPv4 ping test 245
IPv4 unknown multicast frame 170
IPv4/IPv6 dual stack 23
IPv6 23
Neighbor Discovery Protocol 23
ping 23
IPv6 address 121
host server 247
IPv6 Address screen 121
IPv6 information 75
IPv6 ping test 247
IPv6 Ping Test screen 247
ISO 3166
country code 193
J
Java
permissions 50
JavaScripts 50
L
LACP Port screen 156, 157
LAG Management screen 153, 154
LAG Port screen 155
LAG port settings
view 155
latitude 192
LED
Link/ACT 36
PoE 36
SYS 43
LED description 41
LEDs 41
link aggregation (trunking) 95, 152
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) 153
Link Aggregation screen 95
link aggregation setting 70
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) 110
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) screens 186
link status 78
Link/ACT LED 36
LLDP global statistics 110
LLDP Port screen 188
LLDP port settings
inspect and configure 186
LLDP port statistics 110
LLDP screen 110
LLDP Switch settings
configure 186
Index
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
269
Local Information screen 189
Local screen 221
location coordinates 192
Login screen 50
logout
Web Configurator 53
longitude 193
loop guard 97, 158
how it works 97
probe packet 97, 98
Loop Guard screen 98
loop state 97
loop-back test
on Ethernet port 245
M
M4 ground screw 39
MAC address 93, 116, 149
range 62
MAC table flowchart 92
MAC Table screen 92
Maintenance menu
Web Configurator 60
manage the Switch
good habits 24
methods 23
Management Access List screen 236
management VLAN 75, 121
managing the device
using FTP, see FTP
using SNMP, see SNMP
using the Web Configurator, see Web Configurator
Mbuf (Memory Buffer) 241
MD5 authentication protocol 227
Mean Lower Low Water (MLLW) 193
MED Port Location screen 191
MED Port screen 196
memory buffer 222
memory usage 62
Microsoft Edge 50
mini GBIC port 33
connector type 33
transceiver installation 34
transceiver removal 35
mini GBIC ports
connection speed 34
mirror
outgoing traffic 162
Mirror screen 161
model name 62
models
Switch 19
Monitor menu
Web Configurator 54
mounting bracket 28
attach 29
MSA (MultiSource Agreement) 33
MST Instance screen 106, 182, 183
MST Port screen 107, 184
MSTP 104
MSTP (Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol) 104
MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) 86, 138
multicast 169
in monitor 100
multicast packet 136
Multiple Spanning Tree Instance (MSTI) 107, 182, 183
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) 109, 177
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol, see MSTP 104
N
Neighbor Discovery Protocol 23
network application 20
network bottleneck
eliminate 21
network connectivity device 195
network element (NE) 224
network management system (NMS) 224
Network Policy Configuration screen 194
New Network Policy screen 194
NTP (Network Time Protocol) 63, 65
O
one-time schedule 164, 165
Index
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
270
OUI address 146
OUI screen 146
overheating
prevention 25
P
partition image size 240
password
administrator 51
change 24
path cost 178
PD power classification 130
PD priority 130, 132
periodic time range rule
modify 166
ping
IPv4 server 245
IPv6 server 247
Ping of Death 213
ping test
steps 246, 247
Ping Test screen 246
PoE
power management mode 129
PoE (Power over Ethernet) 20
PoE Global screen 129
PoE LED 36
PoE mode 82
PoE MODE button 36
PoE Port screen 129, 131
pop-up windows 50
port
name 126
priority 157
status 128
VLAN ID 141
port counters setting 78
Port Isolation screen 209
port mirroring 161
port name 78
Port Overloading screen 112
Port Rate screen 135
Port screen 87, 125, 140
guest VLAN 144
Port screens 77
Port Security screen 114, 209
port statistics
view 77
Port Status screen 116
port test
steps 245
power connection 40
power module
disconnecting 41
POWER ON/OFF switch 40
Power over Ethernet (PoE) standards 129
Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE) 81, 129
Powered Device (PD) 20, 82, 129
privacy password 228
privilege level
of user 234
protocol based VLAN 91
and IEEE 802.1Q tagging 91
isolate traffic 91
PVID (Port VLAN ID) 87
Q
QoS (Quality of Service) 68, 198
QoS Port screen 198, 204
QoS Queue screen 200
QoS setting 68
R
rack mounting 28
installation requirements 28
steps 29
RADIUS Servers screen 217
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 177
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, see RSTP 104
rear panel 36
Reboot System screen 249
reboot the Switch 249
rebooting 44
Index
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
271
recurring schedule 164, 165
Remote Device screen 111
remote management
using PING 23
reset
to original settings 244
RESET button 43
reset the Switch 43
reset to factory defaults
steps 244
restart the Switch
steps 249
RESTORE button 43
restore configuration
from a file on a server 243
from a file on your computer 243
Restore Factory Default screen 244
restoring configuration 44
revision number
Switch 62
Router Port screen 172
RSTP 104
RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol) 108
rubber feet
attach 26
S
safety precautions 25
Scan attack 213
schedule
one-time 164
recurring 164
type 165, 167
screen resolution 50
screw anchor 26
screw specification
wall mounting 27
security vulnerability
fixes 238
serial number 62
server bottleneck
eliminate 21
service personnel
grounding 39
session timeout 232
value 233
SHA authentication protocol 227
shared server
VLAN example 23
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 224
Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) transceiver 33
SNMP 23, 24
SNMP community
access right 52
SNMP trap
version supported 230
SNMP Trap Host screen 229
SNMP Trap screen 229
SNMP User screen 227
SNMP version 224
SNMPv3 Group screen 225
snooping state
IGMP packet 169
snooping version 169
SNTP
enable 122
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) 122
SNTP Server screen 123
softphone application 195
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 158, 177
Spanning Tree Protocol, see STP 104
spanning tree STP statistics
view 108
speed
of Ethernet connection 127
SSH (Secure SHell protocol) 234
SSH screen 233
startup configuration file
overwrite 244
stateless auto-configuration 23
static address assignment 23
static link aggregation 152
Static MAC screen 149
static router port 103, 172, 173
static VLAN ID 173
Statistics screen 110
status
Index
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
272
LED 41
view 61
Storm Control Port screen 136
Storm Control screen 84, 136
STP 104, 108
STP CIST Port screen 182
STP Port screen 178
straight-through Ethernet cable 33
subnet mask 75, 121
default 74, 120
supported browsers 50
surge protection 39
Switch
fanless-type usage precaution 25
fan-type usage precaution 25
switch reboot 44
SYNchronization (SYN) 215
SYS LED 43
syslog (system logging) 221
Syslog screen 117
syslog server 221
syslog server information
display 223
system
contact 123
location 123
name 123
system date and time 122
system information
view 75
System Information screen 123
system name 62
System screens 74
System Time screen 122
system uptime 62
T
TACACS+ screen 219
TACACS+ Servers screen 219
technical support 241
technician
attach the Switch 25
telnet 23
TELNET screen 233
TFTP 23
TFTP server
IP address 238
time range 133, 164
Time Range Group screen 164, 165
time zone 122
timer 157
trace route
steps 248
Trace Route screen 248
trademarks 264
transceiver 33
installation 34
removal 35
Trap Destination screen 230
trunk
active member 154
standby member 154
U
UDP port 230
unicast 100, 169
unicast packet 136
Upload screen 238
users
currently logged in 62
Users screen 234
V
ventilation holes 25
warning 26
video conferencing equipment 195
VLAN
create 66
tag-based 23
VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) 22, 86, 138
VLAN group 149
membership 142
Index
GS1900 Series User’s Guide
273
VLAN ID 66, 100, 103
VLAN ID (VID) 194
VLAN ID number 139
VLAN name 139
VLAN Port screen 88, 142
VLAN screen 86, 139
VLAN setting 66
VLAN trunking 141
on ports 88
VLAN, protocol based, see protocol based VLAN
voice quality 90
voice traffic 90
voice VLAN 90, 145
voice VLAN ID 146
voice VLAN port
security mode state 148
W
wall mounting 26
installation requirements 27
warranty 264
note 264
Web Configurator 24
access 50
logout 53
navigate 52
password 51
requirements 50
supported browsers 50
warning 51
wiring closet 28
World Geodesic System (WGS) 193
Z
ZON Utility
icon 48
ZON utility 24, 45
hardware requirements 45
installation requirements 45
run 46
supported devices 46
supported firmware version 46
Zyxel AP Configurator 49
Zyxel Discovery Protocol (ZDP) 45
Zyxel One Network (ZON) 45
… 265 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw ZyXEL GS1900 series bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van ZyXEL GS1900 series in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 5.02 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van ZyXEL GS1900 series

ZyXEL GS1900 series Snelstart handleiding - Deutsch, English, Français, Italiano, Espanõl, Polski, Svenska - 2 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info